USER’S MANUAL

Personal Daq/50 Series
USB Data Acquisition Modules

Personal Daq/54
Personal Daq/55
Personal Daq/56
PDQ1
PDQ2

Personal Daq/50 Seriesp/n 491-0901 rev 7.0*372182A-01*
372182A-01

Measurement Computing
10 Commerce Way
Norton, MA 02766(508) 946-5100
Fax: (508) 946-9500
info@mccdaq.com

www.mccdaq.com

ii

Warranty Information

Contact Measurement Computing by phone, fax, or e-mail in regard to warranty-related issues:
Phone: (508) 946-5100, fax: (508) 946-9500, e-mail: info@mccdaq.com

Limitation of Liability

Measurement Computing cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product.

Copyright, Trademark, and Licensing Notice

All Measurement Computing documentation, software, and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved. No part ofthis product may be copied, reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical, photographic, electronic, or other method
without Measurement Computing’s prior written consent. IOtech product names are trademarked; other product names, asapplicable, are trademarks of their respective holders. All supplied IOtech software (including miscellaneous support
files, drivers, and sample programs) may only be used on one installation. You may make archival backup copies.

CE Notice

Many Measurement Computing products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions
standards of the European Community. When applicable these products have a Declaration of Conformity stating which
specifications and operating conditions apply. You can view the Declarations of Conformity at
www.mccdaq.com/legal.aspx (CE Information page).

Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and Tips

Refer all service to qualified personnel. This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage
under noted conditions. Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual.
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment
damage.
This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electricalshock under noted conditions.

This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic
discharge. Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti-static mats and wrist straps, ESD-protective bags
and cartons, and related procedures.

This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or Caution category. These notes can be of great
benefit to the user, and should be read.
In this manual, the book symbol always precedes the words “Reference Note.” This type of note identifies the locationof additional information that may prove helpful. References may be made to other chapters or other documentation.
Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify an issue. Tips may include additionalreference.

Specifications and Calibration
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to
the manual. As applicable, the hardware is calibrated to published specifications. Periodic hardware calibration is notcovered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual. Improper
calibration procedures may void the warranty.

Your order was carefully inspected prior to shipment. When you receive your system, carefully
unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for physical signs of damage that may haveoccurred during shipment. Promptly report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales
representative. Retain all shipping materials in case the unit needs returned to the factory.

CAUTION
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause
personal injury or equipment damage. Before setting up and using yourequipment, you should read all documentation that covers your system.
Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions.
Note:

During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals willautomatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default
location is in the Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows
Desktop. Initial navigation is as follows:
Start [Desktop “Start” pull-down menu]⇒ Programs⇒ IOtech PDaqView Software
You can also access the PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD byusing the <View PDFs> button located on the opening screen.
Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software.
A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader® is included on your CD. The Reader
providesa means of reading and printing the PDF documents.

iv

About This Manual
Chapter 1: Personal Daq ⎯ Unit Startup provides information to get your Personal Daq system up and running.
The chapter includes installation steps, basic concepts regarding the Personal DaqView software program, andsteps for acquiring data.
Chapter 2: General Information & Specifications gives a general description of Personal Daq and related
hardware including PDQ expansion modules. Basic operational concepts and product specifications areincluded.
Chapter 3: Hardware Setup provides detailed information regarding Personal Daq and includes information
regarding direct connection to PC USB, connection to a USB-powered hub, and connection to a self-powered
USB hub. The chapter also includes instruction for connecting a PDQ expansion module and input signal lines.
Chapter 4: Personal DaqView explains the ready-to-use Personal DaqView software that comes with every
Personal Daq. Topics include detailed explanations of the program’s pull-down menus, toolbar icons, andkeypad control options. The chapter includes discussion of Personal DaqViewXL, an add-in software
application that provides setup and data acquisition capabilities from within Microsoft ExcelTM.
Chapter 5: Signal Management discusses signal modes, system noise, and includes a brief discussion of channel
control and expansion.
Chapter 6: Calibration explains how to perform periodic calibrations using the Windows-based program, UserCal.
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Customer AssistanceAppendices
Appendix A: API Custom Program Models explains the program models supplied on the release disk.
Appendix B: API Commands describes the entire command set for Personal Daq. Syntax, parameters,interpretation, and error codes are explained. Sections on the individual commands include their parameters,
types, typical use and related information.
Appendix C: N/A, removed from manual.
Appendix D: Custom Labels provides blank labels and a Personal Daq channel layout reference. The appendix
also pertains to the pDaq_CustomLabels.doc. The file is located in the target directory: \\Program Files\pDaqView.
It provides blank labels in a table format that you can write in, edit, and print out from your PC.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

887695v

vi887695

Personal Daq User’s ManualTable of Contents
1 - Personal Daq ⎯ Unit Startup

4 - Personal DaqView
Overview …… 4-2
Main Control Window …… 4-3

Overview ……1-1
Inspect Your System ……1-1
Install Software ……1-2
Install Hardware ……1-2

Toolbar Buttons …… 4-3
Pull-Down Menus …… 4-3

Channel Configuration Window …… 4-6

Mount Personal Daq Modules to DIN Rail(option) ……1-2
Connect PDQ Module (option) ……1-4
Connect Personal Daq to Host PC ……1-5
Connect Channel Signal Inputs ……1-6

Start Personal DaqView ……1-7
Configure System ……1-8
Channel Configuration ……1-9
Acquisition Configuration ……1-9
Data Destination Configuration ……1-10

Collect Data ……1-10
Quick Start for Personal DaqView …… 1-11

2 - General Information
General Description ……2-1
Channel Capacities ……2-1
Features ……2-2

Theory of Operation ……2-3

Channel Configuration Window Toolbar … 4-6
Channel Configuration Window Pull-downMenus …… 4-6
Common Spreadsheet Columns …… 4-7
Analog Input Spreadsheet …… 4-10
Frequency/Pulse Input Spreadsheet …… 4-12
Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet …… 4-14
Configure Acquisition Dialog Box …… 4-15
Configure Data Destination & File Converter
Preferences …… 4-18
Sequential Destinations (Auto Rearm) …4-19

Bar Graph, Analog, & Digital Meters …4-20
Meter Toolbars …… 4-20
Meter Pull-Down Menus …… 4-21
Meters Configuration Menu …… 4-21
Configuring a Meter …… 4-22
Bar Graph Meters …… 4-24
Analog Meters …… 4-25
Digital Meters …… 4-26

Chart Display …… 4-27

Universal Serial Bus (USB) ……2-3
Power Line Rejection ……2-3
Optical Isolation …… 2-4
A/D Conversion ……2-4
Input Ranges ……2-4
Analog Input Configuration ……2-4
Measurement Duration, Sample Rate, andResolution ……2-5
Automatic Calibration …… 2-6
Thermocouple Measurements ……2-6
Frequency Measurements ……2-7
Digital I/O ……2-7

A Note Regarding Standard, Plus, and XLVersion Software …… 4-27
Groups, Charts, & Channels …… 4-27
Chart Display Window …… 4-27
Pull-Down Menus …… 4-28
Toolbar Items …… 4-29
Chart and Channel Information
Regions …… 4-30
Accessing the Display Configuration Setup Box…… 4-31
Editing a Chart Display Configuration …..4-32
Manually Configuring a Chart Display …. 4-34

Personal Daq Specifications ……2-8

Chart Setup Wizard …… 4-37

Analog Specifications ……2-9
Frequency Specifications ……2-11
Digital I/O Specifications……2-11
General Specifications ……2-11
Optional Accessories …… 2-11
Channel Connection Layouts ……2-12
Calibration ……2-14

Introduction …… 4-37
Automatic Display Setup using the Chart Setup
Wizard …… 4-38
Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup …… 4-39

Using Personal DaqView with Microsoft
ExcelTM …… 4-40

3 - Hardware Setup
Personal Daq, System Components … 3-2
Personal Daq …… 3-2
PDQ Expansion Modules …… 3-2
USB Hubs and Power Adapters …… 3-2

Connecting Your Personal Daq Acquisition
System …… 3-3
Connecting a PDQ Expansion Module to a
Personal Daq …… 3-3
Connecting Various Hardware Setups …… 3-3
Personal Daq User’s Manual

887695vii

5 – Signal Management
Overview ……5-1
Channel Control and Expansion ……5-3Signal Acquisition ……5-3
Measurement Duration, Sample Rate, andResolution ……5-3
Under Sampling and Aliasing …… 5-3
Triggering ……5-5
Input Isolation ……5-5Signal Modes ……5-6
System Noise ……5-7
Averaging ……5-7
Analog Filtering ……5-7
Input and Source Impedance ……5-7
Crosstalk ……5-7

6 - Calibration
Introduction ……6-1
Required Equipment ……6-2
Calibration Procedure ……6-2

7 – Troubleshooting & Customer AssistanceRadio Frequency Interference …… 7-1
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) …… 7-1
Troubleshooting …… 7-2
Customer Assistance …… 7-5

AppendicesA – API Custom Program Models
B – API Commands
C – N/A, removed from manual.
D – Custom Labels

viii

887695

Personal Daq User’s ManualUnit Startup

1
Configure System ……1-8

Overview ……1-1
Inspect Your System ……1-1
Install Software ……1-2
Install Hardware ……1-2

Channel Configuration ……1-9
Acquisition Configuration ……1-9
Data Destination Configuration ……1-10

Mount Personal Daq Modules to DIN Rail(option) ……1-2
Connect PDQ Module (option) ……1-4
Connect Personal Daq to Host PC …1-5
Connect Channel Signal Inputs ……1-6

Collect Data ……1-10
Quick Start for Personal DaqView …… 1-11

Start Personal DaqView ……1-7

Overview
Note:

If you used the Personal Daq Quick Start document (491-0940) to startup your unit, you may
choose to skip this chapter.

Note:

Chapter 3, Hardware Setup, contains detailed information pertaining to hardware issues.

This chapter provides the steps to connect, power up, and run a simple Personal Daq system consisting of
one Personal Daq Unit and one PDQ module. Chapter 3 discusses setting up more involved Personal Daq
systems.
The basic Startup Steps are:
1.
2.
3.

4.

Inspect Your System
Install Software
Install Hardware
a. Mount Personal Daq Modules to DIN Rail (option)b. Connect PDQ Module (option)c. Connect Personal Daq System to your computerd. Connect Channel Inputs
Start Personal DaqView, Configure System, and Collect Data

Inspect Your System
If you have not already done so, check your package contents for damage that may have occurred during
shipment. Immediately report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales representative. Retain all
shipping materials in case the unit must be returned to the factory.
Personal Daq shipments typically contain combinations of the following items, depending on the order.
Your order may include additional items.
Item
Personal Daq1022-0601
501395x-01
491-0940
CA-179-x

Description
Personal Daq/54, /55, or /56 USB Data Acquisition System
Data Acquisition CD. The CD includes several program install options.
Note that the CD includes user manuals.
Personal Daq 50 Series Quick Start Guide
Optional USB Cable, x = meter length., i.e., CA-179-1 (1 meter)CA-179-3 (3 meter), or CA-179-5 (5 meter)
PDQ1 or PDQ2
Optional expansion modules [cannot be used with Personal Daq/54]
PDQ10
Optional PDQ10 DIN-Rail Mounting Kit
Reference Note:
You can refer to our latest catalog for a list of accessories available for Personal Daq.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

8783951-1

CAUTION
When using Personal Daq modules to acquire data, computer energy save modes cancause false data readings. Prior to using Personal Daq modules, ensure yourcomputer’s energy save mode is disabled. If needed, consult your PC user’s manual todisable energy save (power suspension) modes.

Install Software
IMPORTANT: Software must be installed before installing hardware.
1.

Remove previous version Daq drivers, if present. You can do this through Microsoft’s Add/Remove

Programs feature.
2.

Place the Data Acquisition CD into the CD-ROM drive. Wait for PC to auto-run the CD. This may
take a few moments, depending on your PC. If the CD does not auto-run, use the Desktop’sStart/Run/Browse feature.

3.

After the intro-screen appears, follow the screen prompts.

Upon completing the software installation, continue with step 2, Install Hardware.

Install Hardware
Depending on your order, your Personal Daq unit may not require all the steps under this heading; forexample: if you did not order a PDQ expansion module you would not connect one. If a step does not
apply to your unit, simply go on to the next one.
Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: Label slots are included on Personal Daq/55 and /56. The slots are not included on
Personal Daq/54.
Note 2: An expansion module (PDQ1 or PDQ2) can be added to Personal Daq/55 and /56 units.
Although an expansion module can physically connect to a Personal Daq/54, it will not
function with the unit. Personal Daq/54 does not include expansion functionality. For /54 devices,the 25-pin port is used only for calibration as discussed in chapter 6.

1-2

Unit Startup

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualMount Personal Daq Modules to DIN Rail (Option)
The optional PDQ10 DIN Rail Mounting Kit contains a base (BR-24), two feet (FE-8), and an installation
guide. The information found in the guide has been repeated here for user convenience.

1) Mount Personal Daq Module to Base (BR-24)
Note: If your Personal Daq system makes use of an expansion module you willneed a second DIN-rail kit for mounting the expansion module.
1. Remove terminal blocks from Personal Daq Module.
2. Snap Personal Daq’s mount edges into grooves of base (BR-24).
3. Re-install Personal Daq’s terminal blocks.

Inserting Personal Daq’s Mount Edges into Grooves of Base (BR-24)

2) Attach Feet (FE-8) to Base (BR-24)
1. Slide first foot (FE-8) onto base (BR-24). Note the orientation of the Quick Release(see following figure).
2. Keeping the same Quick Release orientation, i.e., both “up” or both “down” as per your preference,slide second foot onto base.
3. Position feet near edge of base. This will provide for best support of unit to DIN rail.

Attaching Feet (FE-8) to Base (BR-24)
Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Unit Startup

1-33) Attach Assembly to DIN Rail (Types NS 35, or NS 32)

Installing Base/Foot Assembly to a DIN Rail Mount
The following steps are based on the orientation illustrated above. Note that feet (FE-8) contain rail catches forboth NS 35 and NS 32 type DIN rails. In each case a different set of rail catches is used.
1. Place the applicable lower rail catch of the feet onto the lower lip of the DIN rail.
2. Push the entire base/foot assembly toward the DIN rail. The assembly will snap into position.

Removing Units from a Type NS 35 DIN Rail1.
2.

Push on both Quick Release sections of the FE-8 feet at the same time.
Lightly pull the base/foot assembly away from the DIN rail.

Removing Units from a Type NS 32 DIN Rail1.
2.

Push up on the base/foot assembly.
Lightly pull the base/foot assembly away from the DIN rail.

Connect PDQ Module (option)
CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should always
handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or circuitcomponents unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD controlled
area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and wrist straps,
ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

CAUTION
Never connect an expansion module to (or remove it from) a Personal Daq main unit
while the main unit is connected to a power source. Such action may result in
EEPROM errors and loss of calibration data.

1-4

Unit Startup

878395

Personal Daq User’s Manual

CAUTION
Never remove a USB cable from an active Personal Daq device while an acquisition isin progress. An active device is any device that is currently open and has channels
configured for scanned input. Such disconnection may require you to exit and thenre-launch Personal DaqView, after the USB cable has been connected.
If you are going to install a PDQ expansion module:
1.
2.
3.

Ensure that no power cable or USB cable is connected to the main unit
Plug the expansion module into the DB25 connector-end of the Personal Daq main unit
Lock the modules together with two locking clips (provided). Refer to the previous figure.

Connect Personal Daq to Host PC
When using a power adapter with your Personal Daq system, be sure to supply power(from the adapter to the Personal Daq) before connecting the USB cable. This allows
Personal Daq to inform the host computer (upon connection of the USB cable) that theunit requires minimal power from the computer.
Use an approved high-speed USB cable to connect the Personal Daq system to one of the host computer’sUSB ports. There is no need for an additional power source in this setup since the power pins (of the PC’s
USB connection) supply 500 mA at 4 to 5.25 V. Additional setup examples are described in Chapter 3,some of which involve USB hubs and/or power adapters.

Connection of a Simple Personal Daq System to a Computer USB Port

Certain notebook computers require the use of a power adapter with your Personal Daq.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Unit Startup

1-5Connect Channel Signal Inputs
CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins
or circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate
ESD controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded matsand wrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.
Use Personal Daq’s screw terminals to connect channel inputs to your Personal Daq system. Note that theterminal blocks are detachable for ease in making connections. The main module (Personal Daq/54,
Personal Daq/55, and Personal Daq/56) and optional PDQ expansion modules (PDQ1 and PDQ2) havelabels which clearly identify each input type and channel number. Each Analog Input channel can be
configured for single-ended or differential volts, or for differential thermocouple inputs. The non-analog
channels are designated as Frequency/Pulse Input (F) and Digital I/O (D).
Note: Personal Daq/54 does not accept frequency/pulse input or digital I/O.
Note: Personal Daq/54 does not support expansion modules.
Reference Note:
Connections for single-ended and differential modes are depicted in the figure on page 1-8.

Reference Note:
Specifications are provided in Chapter 2.

1-6Unit Startup

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualConnecting Thermocouple Wires
Thermocouple wires are to be connected in differential mode only.
In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected single-ended. Doingso can result in noise and false readings. This is especially true when acquiring other highamplitude signals in conjunction with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.
Differential connection is made as follows:(a) the red wire connects to the channel’s Low (L) connector.
(b) the second [color-coded] wire connects to the channel’s High (H) connector.
The section entitled Signal Modes, in chapter 5, contains additional information.

Single-Ended and Differential Connections to Analog Input Channels

Start Personal DaqView
From Windows, open Personal DaqView by double clicking on the Personal DaqView icon, or by using
the Windows Desktop Start Icon to access the Personal DaqView program. You will find Personal
DaqView listed in the desktop’s Program group.
By default, the Personal Daq files will install in C:/Program/Applications. However, you may havechosen a different install setup when prompted during the installation process.
Once the program is executed, the software identifies your Personal Daq device and brings up the Main
Control Window. This window is discussed briefly in the following text, and in more detail in Chapter 4.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Unit Startup

1-7Configure System
This step pertains to configuration of channels and acquisition parameters through Personal DaqView
software. To configure a set of parameters, use the appropriate toolbar button (or the View pull-downmenu) to open the applicable window. Clicking on the Configure Channel Settings button (9) brings up
the Channel Configuration Window.

Main Control Window

Channel Configuration Window, with Analog Input Spreadsheet Selected

1-8

Unit Startup

ButtonFunction

1

Open Configuration File

Opens a selected configuration file.

2

Save Configuration File

Saves the current configuration file to disk.

3

Select Active Device

Provides a means of selecting active devices from the Personal Daq system.

4

Arm Trigger for Disk
RecordingArms the trigger and stores acquisition data to a designated disk file. If Auto Rearm isselected, clicking this button puts Auto rearm in effect. This button, is also used todisarm the data acquisition.

5

Manual Trigger

Used to trigger the device when the mode of trigger is set to “Manual.” Note that the
Manual Trigger button can not be clicked until after the trigger is armed, for example,
by first clickng button 4.

6

Update Digital Outputs

Updates digital outputs for all digital channels that are selected to “output state.” also
see Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet, in Chapter 4).
Does not apply to Personal Daq/54.

7

Configure Data
Destination

Accesses the Configure Data Destination window. Note that this window provides ameans of selecting sequential destinations through an auto rearm feature.

8

Configure Acquisition

Accesses the Configure Acquisition window.

9

Configure Channel
Settings

Brings up the Channel Configuration window. From this window you can configure
channels for Analog Input, Frequency/Pulse Input, and Digital Input/Output channels,
depending on which tab is selected.

10

Update All Indicators

Starts all on-screen indicators with a display of up-to-date data. Has no affect on therecording of data to disk. Auto Rearm, even if selected, will not occur when using thiscontrol. This button is also used to pause all indicators.

11

Display Scrolling Charts

Displays data graphically in a scrolling chart.

12

Display Bar Meters

Displays data in a bar graph format.

13

Display Analog Meters

Displays data displayed in a dial-gage format.

14

Display Digital Meters

Displays data in a digital meter format.

15

View Data

Launches an independent post-data acquisition program such as eZ-PostView.
Refer to the Post Acquisition Analysis PDF (included on your CD) for detailed
information.

16

Enable Readings
ColumnActivates the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect therecording of data to disk.

17

Disable Readings
ColumnStops the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect therecording of data to disk.

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualChannel Configuration
The Channel Configuration Window first opens with the Analog Input screen selected. You can change
from one configuration screen to another by selecting the appropriate tab. More information regarding
Personal DaqView appears in Chapter 4 of this manual. You can configure channels from the three
configuration screens as indicated in the following table.
Channel Type

User Configurable Parameters

Analog Input

User Label, On, Range, Units, Single-Ended/Differential, Measurement Duration, Scale,
OffsetFrequency/Pulse Input

User Label, On, Type, Units, Edge, Debounce, Min. Value, Max. Value, Resolution(Settling Time), Scale, Offset. Frequency/Pulse Input does not apply to Personal Daq/54.

Digital Input/Output

User Label, On, Input/Output, Output State, Power-Up State.
Digital I/O does not apply to Personal Daq/54.

Note: With the mouse cursor positioned in the desired spreadsheet cell, you can:“Single-click” with the left mouse button to open an associated pull-down list for the applicable cell, from which aselection can be made. This pull-down list appears just below the toolbar.
“Double-click” with the left mouse button to cycle through listed selections or write-enable a cell, as applicable. If
the cell has a given parameter list (such as those in the On, Range, and Measurement Duration columns) the
parameter will change with each double-click, allowing you to cycle through all possible selections. Note thatthese selections are repetitive; in other words, you will eventually advance to the same selection you started
with. “Type-in” cells (such as User Label, Scale, and Offset) can be selected on double-click for easy editing.
“Single-click” left, then “single-click” right to write-enable a cell. Completing this action with the mouse buttons(while having the cursor on a cell such as Scale or Offset) allows you to use you PC’s keypad to type thedesired value into the field.
“Single-click” left, “single-click” right, then “single-click” left again to open an associated pull-down list for theapplicable cell, from which a selection can be made. This pull-down list appears in the selected cell’s row.

Acquisition Configuration
To configure acquisition parameters, activate the Configure Acquisition Window by using toolbar
button (8).

Configure Acquisition Window

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Unit Startup

1-9The Configure Acquisition Window has the following default settings.
Pre-Trigger: No duration set, i.e., a duration of 0 scans
Trigger: Immediate
Post Trigger: Manual stop
Averaging: None
Acquisition Parameters:
Set for Maximum scan rate
Frequency: selected
Period: not-selected
Continuous Calibration: not-selected
Overrange Protection: selected

You can change the acquisition setup as desired. Explanations of setup options are discussed in Chapter 4.
Functions that can be obtained with Main Control Window toolbar buttons can also be obtained throughpull-down menus (discussed subsequently). See Chapter 4 for details.

Data Destination Configuration
The Data Destination window can be accessed by using button (7). From the Data Destination window
you can assign a filename and folder location for the acquisition data. More detailed information isprovided in Chapter 4.

Data Destination Window

Collect Data
Click the Enable Readings Column button (16) [see page 1-8], or the Update All Indicators button (10)[see following figure] to start the acquisition. The data acquisition begins and the readings column
becomes active. However, data is not recorded to disk. Clicking the Arm Trigger for Disk Recording
button (4) will send the data to disk.

Click one of the toolbar’s display icon buttons (11, 12, 13, or 14) to see your data in the form of a chart ormeter. Display options are as follows: (11) is scrolling charts, (12) is bar graph meters, (13) is analog
meters, and (14) is digital meters. Note that you can view all display types, or a combination of them, atthe same time.
Note 1: For scrolling charts, a Chart Setup Wizard is used to set up the desired chart display. Channels
not set up in the display can still be enabled and read on the channel configuration window.
Note 2: Chapter 4 is devoted entirely to the Personal DaqView program and its Chart Setup Wizard
feature.

1-10

Unit Startup

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualQuick Start for Personal DaqView
Once your Personal Daq system has been properly connected to the PC and to the desired input signals, thefollowing steps may be used to start Personal DaqView and begin collecting data. For this “Quick Start” approachto collecting data we will be making use of the program’s default settings.
Note that acquisition settings can be changed from the Configure Acquisition Window. This window is accessed via
button (8). Refer to the following figure for location.

When you first open Personal DaqView the Main Control and Channel Configuration Windows appear. These are
portrayed on the following page. The Channel Configuration Window appears with the Analog Input spreadsheet
opened, and with channel PD1_A01 turned “On.” Tabs on the window (see following figure) allow for a quicktransition from one spreadsheet to another.
1.

From Windows, open Personal DaqView by double-clicking on the Personal DaqView icon, or by using theWindows Desktop Start Icon to access the Personal DaqView program.
Once the program is executed, the software identifies your Personal Daq device and brings up the Main Control
Window and Channel Configuration Window (with the Analog Input Spreadsheet Selected).
Note: If the Channel Configuration Window is not visible, click button (9).

2.

Select the tab for the desired spreadsheet. Analog Input is the default. Note that the Frequency/Pulse Input
and Digital Input/Output tabs do not apply to Personal Daq/54.

3.

Ensure the desired channels are enabled. Double-click in a channel’s On/Off cell to enable or disable achannel, as applicable.

4.

If you want to record data to disk, click on button (4) Arm Trigger for Disk Recording. The data acquisition
begins and data is stored to a disk file as indicated in the Data Destination Window. Note that the default
destination, including the default file name of PDAQ.BIN, is as follows:
C:\PROGRAM FILES\PDAQVIEW\PDAQ.BIN. You can, of course, specify a different location.

5.

To see real time readings on the Channel Configuration Window, click on button (10) Update All Indicators
or button (16) Enable Readings Column. The location of button (16) is indicated on page 1-8.

6.

If you want to read data, but not record to disk, click on button (10) or (16), but not button (4). In addition to
the Channel Configuration Windows reading column, you can click on one or more display icon buttons (11,12, 13, or 14) to see your data in the form of a chart or meter. You can view all display types, or a combinationof them, at the same time.
Display options, listed as button number followed by display type, are:oooo(11) scrolling charts(12) bar graph meters(13) analog meters(14) digital meters

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Unit Startup

1-11Main Control Window

Channel Configuration Window, with Analog Input Spreadsheet Selected

ButtonFunction

1

Open Configuration File

Opens a selected configuration file.

2

Save Configuration File

Saves the current configuration file to disk.

3

Select Active Device

Provides a means of selecting active devices from the Personal Daq system.

4

Arm Trigger for Disk
RecordingArms the trigger and stores acquisition data to a designated disk file. If Auto Rearm isselected, clicking this button puts Auto rearm in effect. This button, is also used todisarm the data acquisition.

5

Manual Trigger

Used to trigger the device when the mode of trigger is set to “Manual.” Note that the
Manual Trigger button can not be clicked until after the trigger is armed, for example,
by first clicking button 4.

6

Update Digital Outputs

Updates digital outputs for all digital channels that are selected to “output state.” also
see Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet, in Chapter 4). Digital I/O does not apply to
Personal Daq/54.

7

Configure Data
Destination

Accesses the Configure Data Destination window. Note that this window provides ameans of selecting sequential destinations through an auto rearm feature.

8

Configure Acquisition

Accesses the Configure Acquisition window.

9

Configure Channel
Settings

Brings up the Channel Configuration window. From this window you can configure
channels for Analog Input, Frequency/Pulse Input, and Digital Input/Output channels,
depending on which tab is selected.

10

Update All Indicators

Starts all on-screen indicators with a display of up-to-date data. Has no affect on therecording of data to disk. Auto Rearm, even if selected, will not occur when using thiscontrol. This button is also used to pause all indicators.

11

Display Scrolling Charts

Displays data graphically in a scrolling chart.

12

Display Bar Meters

Displays data in a bar graph format.

13

Display Analog Meters

Displays data displayed in a dial-gage format.

14

Display Digital Meters

Displays data in a digital meter format.

15

View Data

Launches an independent post-data acquisition program, such as eZ-PostView.
Refer to the PostAcquisition Analysis PDF (included on your CD) for detailed
information.

16

Enable Readings
ColumnActivates the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect therecording of data to disk.

17

Disable Readings
ColumnStops the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect therecording of data to disk.

If needed, refer to Chapter 4, Personal DaqView, for more detailed information.

1-12

Unit Startup

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualGeneral Information & Specifications

2

General Description ……2-1

Personal Daq Specifications ……2-9

Channel Capacities ……2-1
Features ……2-2

Analog Specifications ……2-10
Input Voltage Ranges ……2-10
Voltage Specifications ……2-10
Temperature Specifications …2-11
Thermocouple Accuracy ……2-11
Frequency Specifications ……2-12
Digital I/O Specifications……2-12
General Specifications ……2-12
Optional Accessories …… 2-12
Channel Connection Layouts ……2-13
Calibration ……2-15

Theory of Operation ……2-3
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ……2-3
Power Line Rejection ……2-3
Optical Isolation …… 2-4
A/D Conversion ……2-4
Input Ranges ……2-4
Analog Input Configuration ……2-5
Measurement Duration, Sample Rate, andResolution ……2-5
Automatic Calibration …… 2-7
Thermocouple Measurements ……2-7
Frequency Measurements ……2-8
Digital I/O ……2-8

General Description
Personal Daqs are compact data acquisition devices that make use of the Universal Serial Bus (USB).
They can be located up to 5 meters (16.4 feet) from the host PC, allowing the unit to reside close to thepoint of measurement. This reduces noise and improves reading accuracy. USB provides both high-speed
communication and power to the Personal Daq, allowing for a single cable connection to the PC. No
additional power supplies are required, except in special setups of multiple units, or when connected tocertain notebook PCs.
Note: Advanced setups, using several Personal Daq units, are possible. These setups require USB hubs
(self-powered or USB-powered). In addition, depending on the setup, certain Personal Daqs in thesystem may require connection to a power adapter as indicated in Chapter 3, Hardware Setup.
Note: Some notebook PCs require the use of a power adapter with the Personal Daq. Chapter 3 contains
more information regarding power adapters.
Personal Daq/55 and /56 allow for system expansion by snapping a PDQ expansion module onto the unit.
Chapter 3, Hardware Setup, contains detailed information regarding various setup options.
Although Personal Daq/54 has a 25-pin connector, it does not accept expansion modules. The
connector, in the case of Personal Daq/54, is used only for calibration as discussed in chapter 6.

Channel Capacities
The following table highlights the differences between modules and provides a means for calculating thetotal channel capacity of a Personal Daq system.
Channel Capacities for Various Personal Daq Setups
Personal Daq/54
Personal Daq/54---- No Expansion ---Personal Daq/55 Systems

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

5 DE, or 10 SE

5 DE---- N/A -------- N/A ----

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

Personal Daq/55

5 DE, or 10 SE

5 DE

8

2

Personal Daq/55 with PDQ1

15 DE, or 30 SE

15 DE

24

2

Personal Daq/55 with PDQ225 DE, or 50 SE

25 DE

8

2

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

Personal Daq/56

Personal Daq/56 Systems

10 DE, or 20 SE

10 DE

16

4

Personal Daq/56 with PDQ1

20 DE, or 40 SE

20 DE

32

4

Personal Daq/56 with PDQ230 DE, or 60 SE

30 DE

16

4

DE = Differential Mode, SE = Single-Ended Mode

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878695General Information & Specifications

2-1

Note:

With the use of USB hubs up to 100 Personal Daq units can be attached to one PC. With 100
Personal Daq/56 modules (each with a PDQ2 expansion module) a total channel capability of
8,000 channels can be obtained. An example of capacity calculation follows.

Calculating System Channel Capacity, An Example
Assume a Personal Daq system is comprised of the following:••

one Personal Daq/56 unit
one PDQ2 expansion module

Using the table on page 2-1 (looking in the bottom row) we see that a Personal Daq/56 with PDQ2 can accept thefollowing types of channel connections:••••

60 single-ended (or 30 differential mode) for volts inputs
30 differential mode for thermocouple inputs
16 Digital I/O
4 Frequency/Pulse inputs

The maximum channel capacity in this set up is 80 channels. With the use of differential mode
(instead of single-ended) the maximum channel capacity is 50 channels.

In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected single-ended. Doingso can result in noise and false readings. This is especially true when acquiring other highamplitude signals in conjunction with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.

Features
The Personal Daq system includes the following features:•

USB connection to the PC means no batteries or other power sources required (see notes)•

signal input connections via removable screw-terminals•

high-resolution 22-bit A/D converter•internal cold-junction compensator for direct thermocouple measurements•

500 VDC isolation for PC protection•

low noise thermocouple and voltage measurements•

full-scale voltage inputs from –10 VDC to +20 VDC•

frequency/pulse measurements from DC to 1 Mhz (Does not apply to Personal Daq/54)•

digital I/O with current sink capability for direct drive applications•

with addition of PDQ expansion module, up to 80 channels of analog and digital I/O are available
for one Personal Daq/PDQ combined unit (Does not apply to Personal Daq/54)•

up to 100 Personal Daq/PDQ (combined units) can be connected to one PC by the use of USB hubs;
providing a total channel capacity of 8,000 channels•

digital calibration eliminates the need for potentiometers and user adjustments•

Personal DaqView and driver software•

external power input jack for use with notebook PCs and various setups (discussed in Chapter 3)

Note 1: Certain system configurations make use of USB hubs and power adapters, as discussed in
Chapter 3.
Note 2: Some notebook PCs require that a power adapter be used with your Personal Daq.
Chapter 3 contains more information regarding power adapters.

2-2

General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualTheory of Operation
Universal Serial Bus (USB)The Universal Serial Bus is ideal for data acquisition applications. Since USB ports(located on the PC) provide power, only one cable is needed to link an acquisition
device to the PC. In addition, USB’s high-speed data transfer (from the data acquisition
device to the PC) allows for real-time display of acquired data while eliminating theneed for additional memory in the acquisition device. USB supports transfer rates up to
12 Mbytes/sec and supports real-time data transfer. Standard USB connectors can be
identified by a USB icon.

Power Line Rejection
Personal Daq can take readings while making use of 50/60Hz line cycle rejection (120 dB). While in theline cycle rejection mode, the maximum sample rate is as follows:••

Personal Daq User’s Manual

50 Hz rejection: 7.7 samples/sec
60 Hz rejection: 9.2 samples/sec

878595General Information & Specifications

2-3

Optical Isolation
The Personal Daq is optically isolated from its host PC by up to 500 VDC. This means that an inadvertent
application of such voltage to Personal Daq will not affect the PC. In addition to optical isolation, Personal
Daq maintains all sensitive acquisition-related circuitry external to the PC. This physical isolation of
circuitry from the PC results in less noise and more accurate measurements.

A/D Conversion
Personal Daq uses a sigma-delta analog/digital converter to provide high resolution and sensitivity. Whenscanning multiple input channels, resolution and speed can be selected from 22 bits at 1.6 samples/sec, to
15 bits at 80 samples/sec (not including cold-junction compensation).
You can select resolution and speed on a per-channel basis, allowing you to match parameters to individual
channel requirements. For example, you could select 21 bit resolution to detect small temperature changes
on one channel, and select 15 bit resolution to measure battery voltage on a second channel. Althougheach channel can have a different resolution and measurement period, all channels are scanned at the samerate to ensure sampling interval integrity. Examples of scan sequences, with various channel resolutions
and calibration arrangements, appear in the figure on page 2-7.

Input Ranges
You can individually select the input range for each channel. For example, one channel could be used forvolts and another for temperature. Personal DaqView automatically assigns the appropriate units
depending on two factors:••

the selected range andmeasurement unit preferences

Measurement unit preferences can be modified from Personal DaqView’s Preferences Dialog Box locatedin the View pull-down menu of the Main Control Window. Chapter 4 provides more detailed information.
Note:

The maximum voltage input range (full scale) is –10 to +20 VDC. The lowest programmable
voltage input range is -31 to +31 mV. A complete list of Personal Daq’s programmable ranges
appears on page 2-8.

Each analog input channel has the following user-specified measurement parameters:
•
•
•

2-4

signal type: volts, or thermocouple type J, K, T, E, R, S, B, or N
full scale voltage: from -10 to + 20 VDC; with programmable ranges as indicated on page 2-8.
resolution/sample period: from 22 bit RMS at 1.6 samples/sec, to 15 bit RMS at 80 samples/sec(note that these rates were obtained with a 10-channel scan, continuous self-calibration disabled,
and are for measurements with no CJC [cold junction compensation])

General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualAnalog Input Configuration
Personal Daq/54 and Personal Daq/55 each include 10 analog signal inputs which may be used as 10
single-ended inputs, 5 differential inputs, or as a combination of single-ended and differential inputs withup to 10 connections. Personal Daq/56 includes 20 analog signal inputs which may be used as 20 singleended inputs, 10 differential inputs, or as a combination of single-ended and differential inputs with up to
20 connections.
Single-ended inputs are used with signals that share the same common low (COM), such as multiple
batteries which have their negative sides connected in common. Differential inputs are required when
signals do not share the same common low, such as in the typical use of thermocouples. A simple
example showing two single-ended inputs (V1 and V2) and a differential input (V3) follows.
In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected single-ended. Doingso can result in noise and false readings. This is especially true when acquiring other highamplitude signals in conjunction with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.

Single-Ended and Differential Connections to Analog Input Channels
For Personal Daq/55 and Personal Daq/56, the number of analog input channels can be expanded withuse of a PDQ expansion module. There are two types of PDQ expansion modules, either type can besnapped on to a Personal Daq unit; however, each Personal Daq can support only one expansion module.
PDQ1 modules add 20 single-ended (or 10 differential) inputs to the Personal Daq/55 or /56.
PDQ2 modules add 40 single-ended (or 20 differential) inputs to the Personal Daq/55 or /56.

Measurement Duration, Sample Rate, and Resolution
In relation to sampling analog input, the terms measurement duration, sample rate, and resolution have thefollowing meanings:
Measurement duration (per channel) – the amount of time used for sampling a channel’s input signal.
You can independently set the measurement duration for each channel. The measurement durations for
Personal Daq’s analog channels range from very slow (610 milliseconds for one sample) to very fast
(12.5 milliseconds for one sample).
Sample rate – Samples per second. The sample rate is the number of samples that take place per second.
With the very slow measurement duration of 610 milliseconds, there will only be 1.6 samples per second.
With the very fast measurement duration of 12.5 milliseconds, there will be 80 samples per second.
Resolution (Bit RMS) – The number of reliable data bits that exist for a signal’s measurement. The greater
the resolution, the more detailed the reading, for example, with increased resolution a reading of 5.12 V
could become 5.11896 V. Personal Daq actually provides for 24 bits of data information; however, theaccuracy of the least significant bits becomes less as the measurement duration speeds up.
Personal Daq User’s Manual

878595General Information & Specifications

2-5

At a measurement duration of 610 milliseconds, the last two bits are considered unreliable, resulting in a
resolution of 22 bits. At a very fast measurement duration (12.5 milliseconds), the nine most leastsignificant bits are unreliable, resulting in 15 bit accuracy.
1

Speed vs. Resolution
Speed Designation

Maximum
2
Sample Rate
(Samples/sec)

2

Resolution(Bits RMS)(-4 V to +4 V range)

Very Slow, 50 / 60 Hz rejection

610 ms

1.6 / sec

22

Slow, 50 Hz rejection

370 ms

2.7 / sec

22

Slow, 60 Hz rejection

310 ms3.2 / sec

22

Medium, 50 Hz rejection

130 ms

7.7 / sec

21

Medium, 60 Hz rejection

110 ms

9.2 / sec

21

Medium40 ms

25 / sec

19

Fast

20 ms

48 / sec

17

12.5 ms

80 / sec

15

Very Fast
Notes:

Note:

2-6

Measurement
Duration(per channel)

1. Each channel can have independent measurement duration and resolution.
2. The sample rates and resolutions shown were obtained with a 10-channel scan and with
continuous self-calibration disabled.
3. Duration does not include the use of CJC measurements.

When measuring variable input signals (as opposed to relatively steady input signals), the variable
signals will require more samples/sec to obtain a realistic signal representation. Available sample
rates range from 1.6 samples per second up to 80 samples per second as indicated in the precedingtable.

General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualAutomatic Calibration
The Personal Daq module contains a built-in source for performing automatic self-calibrations. These
calibrations can be performed between scans periodically throughout the measurement process, as
indicated in the following figure. Such calibration ensures accurate measurements, even in environmentsthat experience significant temperature fluctuations.
With exception of an automatic initial calibration, Personal Daq’s self calibrations are optional, and may
be discontinued (automatically) if the maximum sampling rate is used. This is because the time between
scans can become too short to permit calibration. In this instance, the PC can initiate calibration
immediately prior to the measurement process (see example 3 in the following figure).
Note: The continuous calibration feature is selected (or deselected) from the Configure Acquisition dialog
box. See Chapter 4 for more information.

Three Examples of Calibration/Scan Arrangements

Thermocouple Measurements
Personal Daq provides effortless thermocouple (TC) measurements. The unit includes built-in coldjunction compensation (CJC), which is automatically invoked when you select TC measurements. The
Personal Daq automatically converts acquired voltage readings into compensated-linearized temperature
readings. A Personal Daq system can make thermocouple and volts measurements concurrently.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878595General Information & Specifications

2-7

Frequency Measurements (Not applicable to Personal Daq/54)
Each frequency/pulse input channel can measure from DC to 1 MHz, offering pulse count (totalize),frequency, and duty cycle type readings. The input voltage range is -15 to +15 VDC absolute maximum.
TTL sense levels, Schmitt-trigger inputs <1.3 V (low), >3.8 V (high).
Note that each frequency channel can measure pulses that are due to closures of a contact between the
input terminal and the Lo terminal. This is because an internal pull-up resistor places the input at +5V
when the contact is open and allows the input to go to 0V when the contact is closed.
Frequency and pulse measurements can be scanned along with analog input measurements with resolution
up to 7 digits.

Digital I/O (Not applicable to Personal Daq/54)
You can program each digital I/O line individually as input or output. Digital input lines can be read aspart of the analog scan sequence and can be scanned over 100 times per second. Digital output lines can be
updated at any time prior to, or during an acquisition sequence; or can be automatically updated.
Digital input voltage ranges from 0 to +15 VDC are permitted, with thresholds of: <1.3V (low) and>3.8V (high). In the output mode each output is an open-collector, with each bank of eight outputs
capable of sinking up to 150 mA for direct drive applications. External pull-up voltages can be up to +15
VDC (Over-voltage is rated at +20 VDC for up to 1 minute). Refer to the following figure for information
regarding Digital I/O connection.

Personal Daq, Digital Output Connections
Note: The figure represents connections for one channel (D8). The other sevenchannels (D1 … D7) are connected in the same manner.
Note: The maximum load current is 150 mA per 8-channel bank, or
if all eight channels are used, 18 mA (max) per channel.

2-8General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualPersonal Daq Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

CAUTIONIf equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual, or if specification
limits are exceeded, the function of the equipment, as well as the protection provided
by it, may be impaired.
Channel Capacities for Various Personal Daq Setups
Personal Daq/54
Personal Daq/54---- No Expansion ---Personal Daq/55 Systems

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

5 DE, or 10 SE

5 DE---- N/A -------- N/A ----

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

Personal Daq/55

5 DE, or 10 SE

5 DE

8

2

Personal Daq/55 with PDQ1

15 DE, or 30 SE

15 DE

24

2

Personal Daq/55 with PDQ225 DE, or 50 SE

25 DE

8

2

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

Personal Daq/56

10 DE, or 20 SE

10 DE

16

4

Personal Daq/56 with PDQ1

20 DE, or 40 SE

20 DE

32

4

Personal Daq/56 with PDQ230 DE, or 60 SE

30 DE

16

4

Personal Daq/56 Systems

DE = Differential Mode, SE = Single-Ended Mode

Speed vs. Resolution1
Speed Designation

2

Measurement
Duration

Maximum
2
Sample Rate(per channel)(Samples/sec)

Very Slow, 50 / 60 Hz rejection

610 ms

1.6 / sec

22

Slow, 50 Hz rejection

370 ms

2.7 / sec

22

Slow, 60 Hz rejection

310 ms3.2 / sec

22

Medium, 50 Hz rejection

130 ms

7.7 / sec

21

Medium, 60 Hz rejection

110 ms

9.2 / sec

21

Medium40 ms

25 / sec

19

Fast

20 ms

48 / sec

17

Very Fast

12.5 ms

80/ sec

15

Notes:

Resolution(Bits RMS)(-4 V to +4 V range)

1. Each channel can have independent measurement duration and resolution.
2. The sample rates and resolutions shown were obtained with a 10-channel
scan and with continuous self-calibration disabled.
3. Duration does not include the use of CJC measurements.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878595General Information & Specifications

2-9

Analog Specifications
Each channel can be individually configured for single ended or differential; volts or thermocouple inputs.
Personal Daq/54: configurable for 10 single-ended, 5 differential; volts or TC channels
Personal Daq/54 does not accept expansion modules.
Personal Daq/55: configurable for 10 single-ended, 5 differential; volts or TC channels
Personal Daq/56: configurable for 20 single-ended, 10 differential; volts or TC channels
PDQ1 Expansion Module: configurable for 20 single-ended, 10 differential; volts or TC channels
PDQ2 Expansion Module: configurable for 40 single-ended, 20 differential; volts or TC channels
Input Voltage Range Relative to Analog Common (COM): -10 to +20 VDC

Input Voltage Ranges
RMS Noise (µV) typical*

Programmable Voltage Ranges
Very
Slow

-10 V to +20 V (Single-ended only)-20 V to +20 V (Differential only)-10 V to +10 V-5 V to +5 V
-4 V to +4 V
-2.5 V to +2.5 V-2 V to +2 V
-1.25 V to +1.25 V-1 V to +1 V
-625 mV to +625 mV-500 mV to +500 mV-312 mV to +312 mV-250 mV to +250 mV-156 mV to +156 mV-125 mV to +125 mV-62 mV to +62 mV-31 mV to +31 mV

Slow

120
120
35
7
4
4
4
2
2
3.5
1
3
1
2.5
1
1
1

Medium50, 60 Hz
Rejection

Medium

120
120
35
10
5
8
4
3
3
4.5
2
4
2
4
1.5
1.5
1.5

120
120
75
60
20
55
15
9
15
10
15
8
8
8
7
6
6

120
120
35
7
4
5
4
2
2
3.5
1.5
3
1
4
1
1
1

Fast

Very
Fast

270
270
190
95
60
75
30
20
20
15
15
10
8
8
7
5
5

1600
1600
740
370
340
200
150
110
75
50
40
30
25
20
20
9
7

*Note: Noise measured with continuous self-calibration disabled.

Voltage Specifications (one year, 15 to 35°C)
Accuracy:
Personal Daq/54: 0.015% of reading + .004% of range (exclusive of noise)
Personal Daq/55: 0.01% of reading + .002% of range (exclusive of noise)
Personal Daq/56: 0.01% of reading + .002% of range (exclusive of noise)
Input Offset Voltage:
Personal Daq/54: <30µV (differential or single-ended)
Personal Daq/54: <20µV (differential or single-ended)
Personal Daq/54: <20µV (differential or single-ended)
Peak-to-Peak Noise: 6 x RMS Noise
Temperature Coefficient: (5 ppm + 1 µV)/°C
Input Resistance: 10MΩ (single ended); 20MΩ (differential); ±5%Bias Current: <1 nA (0 to 35°C)
DC Common Mode Gain Error: <100 ppm typical; <2 ppm/°C common mode gain drift typicalAC Common Mode Rejection: >120 dB @ 50 Hz (610 ms, 370 ms, 130 ms measurement durations);>120 dB @ 60 Hz (610 ms, 310 ms, 110 ms measurement durations)
AC Normal Mode Rejection:>80 dB @ 50 Hz (610 ms, 370 ms, 130 ms measurement durations);>80 dB @ 60 Hz (610 ms, 310 ms, 110 ms measurement durations)

Channel-to-Channel Cross Talk: < -110 dB (DC to 100 Hz; up to 10 kΩ source resistance)
Over-Voltage Protection: ±45 V relative to analog common

2-10

General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualTemperature Specifications (one year, 15 to 35°C)
Note: All temperature specifications assume unit is held in relatively still air environment.
Thermocouple Types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N
Cold-Junction Compensation Accuracy:
Personal Daq/54: ±0.7°C
Personal Daq/55: ±0.5°C
Personal Daq/56: ±0.5°C

Thermocouple Accuracy
In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected
single-ended. Doing so can result in noise and false readings. This isespecially true when acquiring other high-amplitude signals in conjunction
with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.

Thermocouple Accuracy (°C) for Personal Daq/54, /55, and /56 *TC Type

J

K

T

E

R

S

B
N

Temp.
(°C)

Very
Slow

Slow

MediumMediumFast

Very Fast

50, 60 Hz
Rejection

-100

0.4

0.4

0.6

1.3

1.3

3.8

0

0.3

0.3

0.4

1.1

1.1

3
2.5

700

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.9

0.9

-100

0.5

0.5

0.7

1.8

1.8

5

0

0.4

0.4

0.6

1.4

1.4

3.9

600

0.4

0.4

0.6

1.3

1.3

3.7
4.5

-50

0.4

0.4

0.7

1.6

1.6

0

0.4

0.4

0.6

1.4

1.4

4

200

0.3

0.3

0.4

1

1

2.9

-100

0.3

0.3

0.5

1.2

1.2

3.4

0

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.9

0.9

2.6

500

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.7

0.7

1.9

400

1.5

1.5

2

5.2

5.2

14.8

700

1.3

1.3

2

4.6

4.6

13.1

1400

1.2

1.2

1.7

3.9

3.9

11

400

1.6

1.6

2

5.6

5.6

16

700

1.5

1.5

2

5.2

5.2

14.7

1400

1.3

1.3

2

4.6

4.6

12.8

700

2.2

2.2

3.3

7.9

7.9

13.7

1400

1.4

1.4

2

4.8

4.8

13.7

-100

0.7

0.7

1

2.6

2.6

7.3

0

0.6

0.6

0.8

2

2

5.9

700

0.4

0.4

0.6

1.4

1.4

4

*Note: Thermocouple accuracy excludes cold junction compensation error.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878595General Information & Specifications

2-11

Frequency Specifications, one year 0 to 50°C

(Not applicable to Personal Daq/54)

Operating Modes: Pulse count (totalize), frequency, and duty cycle
Frequency Response: DC to 1 MHz
Accuracy: 100 ppm; 1 ppm/°C
Resolution: Up to 7 digits, user selectable.
Input Voltage Range: -15 to +15 VDC Absolute Maximum, TTL sense levels
Schmitt-trigger inputs, <1.3 V (low), >3.8 V (high)Pull-up Resistor: 27 KΩ to +5 V for switch or relay sensing
Debouncing: None, 0.8, 3.2, or 13 milliseconds (software selectable)
32
Totalize: Up to 2 counts/scan

Digital I/O Specifications(Not applicable to Personal Daq/54)

Configuration: Each I/O line is individually selectable as input or output. Each I/O line includes an open-collector driverwith a 27 KΩ pull-up resistor to +5 V for output, and a Schmitt-trigger input buffer.
Over-Voltage: +20 VDC for up to 1 minuteOutput Characteristics:
Voltage Range: 0 to +5VDC with no external pull up resistor; 0 to +15VDC with external pull up
Maximum Sink Current:
150 mA/output continuous, 500 mA output peak (<100 µs),
150 mA total continuous (per bank of 8 outputs)
Output Resistance: 10 Ω max
Output Updates: Outputs may be changed via program control
Input Characteristics:
Voltage Range: 0 to +15VDC
Thresholds: <1.3 V (low), > 3.8 V (high)General Specifications
Warm-up: 1 hour to rated specifications
Environment:
Operating: 0-50°C, 0-95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage: -20 to 70°C
Isolation: 500 VDC from PC common
USB Power Source: PC USB port or self-powered USB hub; 500 mA maximum
External Power Source: Required when used with a bus-powered hub; +6 to +16 VDC, 500 mA
Option Notes: (1) the TR-2 External Power Supply is a 120 VAC to +9 VDC adapter;(2) the TR-2E External Power Supply is a 230 VAC to +9 VDC adapter
Vibration: MIL Std 810E
Dimensions: 92 x 182 x 45 mm (3.6 x 7.1 x 1.8 inches)
Weight: Personal Daq/55: 300g (10.5 oz )Personal Daq/54: 300g (10.5 oz )Personal Daq/56: 360g (12.5 oz)
PDQ1: 300g (10.5 oz )PDQ2: 300g (10.5 oz )Optional Accessories
PDQ10 – DIN-Rail Mounting
PDQ11 – 4 powered USB Hub with cable
PDQ12 – USB extender cable, 5 meters
PDQ13 – PCI to dual USB card
TR-2 − External Power Supply, 120 VAC to +9 VDC adapter
TR-2E − External Power Supply, 230 VAC to +9 VDC adapter
CN-153-12 − Terminal Block
USB Cables: CA-179-3 (3 meter)CA-179-5 (5 meter)

2-12General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualChannel Connection Layouts
The following indicate channel connection layouts for Personal Daq/54, /55, and /56. Connection layouts
for expansion modules (PDQ1 and PDQ2) follow shortly. Personal Daq/54 provides no functionality
for expansion modules.

Analog In Single-ended inputs are used with analog signals that share the same common low, such as
multiple batteries which have their negative sides connected in common. Differential inputs are required
when signals do not share the same common low, such as in the typical use of thermocouples. Note thatthe analog low common references are -10 to +20 Volts. Analog low commons (COM) are located on thesame terminal blocks as are the analog channel connections, and should not be confused with the frequencylows (Lo) discussed later.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878595General Information & Specifications

2-13

In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected single-ended. Doingso can result in noise and false readings. This is especially true when acquiring other highamplitude signals in conjunction with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.
Personal Daq units include built-in cold-junction compensation (CJC), which is automatically invokedwhen you select TC measurements. The Personal Daq automatically converts acquired voltage readings
into compensated-linearized temperature readings. A Personal Daq system can make thermocouple andvolts measurements concurrently.
Frequency/pulse These input channels can measure from DC to 1MHz. Readings can be in pulse count(totalize), frequency, or duty cycle. Input voltage range is –15 to +15VDC, with the logic threshold at<1.3V (low) and >3.8V (high). Frequency and pulse measurements can be scanned along with analog
input measurements with resolution up to 7 digits. Frequency low connections (Lo) are not to be confusedwith the analog commons (COM). Frequency Los are located next to F1 and F3 channel connections. The
connection points labeled “Lo” serve as a common reference for frequency inputs. Frequency/pulse
channels do not apply to Personal Daq/54.
Digital I/O You can program each digital I/O line individually as input or output. The digital I/O lines
do not make use of the Lo or COM connections. Digital output lines do make use of special digital returnlines designated by the letters RTN. Digital I/O channels do not apply to Personal Daq/54.

Digital input lines can be read as part of the analog scan sequence and can be scanned over
100 times per second. Digital input voltage may range from 0 to +15V, with the logic threshold at<1.3V (low) and >3.8V (high). Digital values outside of the 0 to +15V range are not permitted.
Digital output lines can be updated at any time prior to, or during an acquisition sequence; or canbe automatically updated over 100 times per second. Digital outputs share a common return(RTN). In the output mode each output is an open-collector capable of sinking up to 150mA for
direct drive applications, and capable of pull-up voltages up to +15 VDC. Note that over-voltage
is rated at +20 VDC for up to 1 minute.
2-14

General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualNote:The digital output can be written to since the digital output lines are latched.

Note:

Appendix D contains blank user custom labels and information regarding pDaq_CustomLabels.doc(located in the installation target directory of \\Program Files\pDaqView). User custom labels allow
you to identify Personal Daq channels by user-specific nomenclature, in addition to thepre-existing channel labels (indicated on this and the preceding page).

Calibration
Calibration must be completed periodically to ensure your data acquisition device remains accurate. You can use
UserCal (a Windows-based program) to provide step-by-step instructions. Chapter 6 contains detailed information
regarding calibration.
Note:

Calibration constants are calculated and stored in the Personal Daq unit’s serial EEPROM.

Note:

The typical calibration period for Personal Daq is once every year.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878595General Information & Specifications

2-15

This page is intentionally blank.

2-16

General Information & Specifications

878595

Personal Daq User’s ManualHardware Setup

3

Personal Daq, System Components ……3-2
Personal Daq …… 3-2
PDQ Expansion Modules …… 3-2
USB Hubs and Power Adapters …… 3-3

Connecting Your Personal Daq Acquisition System …… 3-4
Connecting a PDQ Expansion Module to a Personal Daq …… 3-4
Connecting Various Hardware Setups …… 3-4
Example 1: Direct Connection to Computer USB Port(s) …… 3-4
Example 2: Connection to USB-Powered Hub …… 3-5
Example 3: Connections to Self-Powered and USB-Powered Hubs …… 3-5

CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should always
handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or circuitcomponents unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD controlled
area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and wrist straps,
ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

CAUTION
Never connect an expansion module to (or remove it from) a Personal Daq main unit
while the main unit is connected to a power source. Such action may result in
EEPROM errors and loss of calibration data.

CAUTION
Never remove a USB cable from an active Personal Daq device while an acquisition isin progress. An active device is any device that is currently open and has channels
configured for scanned input. Such disconnection may require you to exit and thenre-launch Personal DaqView, after the USB cable has been connected.

CAUTION
When using Personal Daq modules to acquire data, computer energy save modes cancause false data readings. Prior to using Personal Daq modules, ensure yourcomputer’s energy save mode is disabled. If needed, consult your PC user’s manual todisable energy save (power suspension) modes.

When using a power adapter with your Personal Daq system, be sure to supply power(from the adapter to the Personal Daq) before connecting the USB cable. This allows
Personal Daq to inform the host computer (upon connection of the USB cable) that theunit requires minimal power from the computer.
Note:

Personal Daq User’s ManualThis chapter pertains to hardware aspects of the Personal Daq, including the PDQ expansion
modules and two basic types of USB hubs (self-powered and USB-powered). Productspecifications are contained in the previous chapter.

878695

Hardware Setup

3-1

Personal Daq, System Components
Personal Daq
The following illustration points out key physical features of the Personal Daq. Aside from labeling andthe number of terminal blocks, Personal Daq/54, /55, and /56 look very much alike. Upon closer
examination you can see differences.
Both the /55 and /56 contain a DB25 expansion port for mating with a PDQ expansion module. Slots on
the main units and expansion modules provide a means of attaching units securely with locking clips.
Personal Daq/54 also has a DB25 port. However, in the case of the Daq/54 the port is used only forcalibration as discussed in chapter 6. Personal Daq/54 contains no functionality in regard to expansion
modules. Also note that Personal Daq/54 has no terminal block for Digital I/O and no Frequency/pulse
input terminals.
A customized label can be inserted in slots above the terminal connectors. The labels are especially usefulin acquisition systems that consist of several Personal Daqs and PDQ expansion modules. Appendix D
contains blank labels.
Note 1

Note 2

Note 1:

Label slots are included on Personal Daq/55 and /56. The slots are not included on
Personal Daq/54.

Note 2:

An expansion module (PDQ1 or PDQ2) can be added to Personal Daq/55 and /56 units.
Although an expansion module can physically connect to a Personal Daq/54, it will not
function with the unit. Personal Daq/54 does not include expansion functionality. For /54
devices, the 25-pin port is used only for calibration as discussed in chapter 6.

Note 3:“Active” [LED blinking] means that an acquisition is in progress. “Ready” [LED on solid] meansthat the unit has power, has USB communications established, and is ready to acquire data.

PDQ Expansion Modules (Does not apply to Personal Daq/54)
You can connect either of two PDQ expansion modules (PDQ1 or PDQ2) to the Personal/55 andPersonal/56 units. Module specifications are listed in the preceding chapter.
With exception of the end-faces, the PDQ modules have the same physical appearance as Personal Daq/56.
The above figure includes an illustration of a PDQ2 module connected to a Personal Daq/55. Two locking
clips are used to hold the units together. The clips ensure a good connection is maintained.
Personal Daq/54 does not accept expansion modules.

3-2

Hardware Setup

878695

Personal Daq User’s ManualUSB Hubs and Power Adapters
With the use of USB hubs you can connect up to 100 Personal Daq units to one PC. USB hubs can be of
the self-powered type, or of the USB-powered type. Both types of hubs are available from a variety ofvendors; however, if you encounter any difficulty in obtaining a USB hub, please contact your service
representative.
Power Adapters − Power adapters, also referred to as auxiliary power packs, are required for some selfpowered hubs, and for Personal Daq modules that are powered from USB-powered hubs. In addition,
Personal Daq units will require the use of a power adapter when used with certain laptops.
When using a power adapter with your Personal Daq system, be sure to supply power(from the adapter to the Personal Daq) before connecting the USB cable. This allows
Personal Daq to inform the host computer (upon connection of the USB cable) that theunit requires minimal power from the computer.
Power adapters for use with Personal Daq have a current limit of 500 mA (min.) and a voltage range of+6 to +16 Volts DC. These specifications are provided on the end-face of the Personal Daq.
If the computer does not recognize the Personal Daq unit, make sure the computer’s USB port is properly
enabled and is in good working order. If the computer still fails to recognize the Personal Daq, the use of apower pack may be required. In United States use a TR-2 power pack, or equivalent. In Europe use a
TR-2E power pack, or equivalent. Both the TR-2 and the TR-2E provide 500 mA min, +6 to +16 VDC.
The use of certain notebook computers may require the use of a power adapter withyour Personal Daq.

USB-powered Hubs − These hubs draw all power from the host USB connector’s power pins. The poweris used for hub internal functions and for the hub’s ports. Each port of a USB-powered hub must be
capable of supplying at least 100 mA.
Self-powered Hubs − These hubs draw power from a source other than the host USB connector, withexception that they may draw up to 100 mA from their upstream connection for hub internal functions.
The external power is used for hub internal functions and for the hub’s ports. Each port of a self-powered
hub must be capable of supplying 500 mA.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878695

Hardware Setup

3-3

Connecting Your Personal Daq Acquisition System
Review the CAUTIONS and notes (presented on page 3-1) prior to connecting or
disconnecting components.

Connecting a PDQ Expansion Module to a Personal Daq/55 or /56
To connect a PDQ expansion module to a Personal Daq/55 or /56 unit:
1.

Review the CAUTIONS and notes presented on page 3-1.

2.

Ensure the Personal Daq main unit is not connected to a USB port.

3.

Ensure the Personal Daq main unit is not connected to a power adapter.

4.

Plug the expansion module into the DB25 connector on the Personal Daq main unit.

5.

Lock the two modules together using two locking clips (see figure, page 3-2).

6.

Connect the Personal Daq main unit to power according to your system setup (3 examples
follow).
When using a power adapter with your Personal Daq system, be sure to supply power(from the adapter to the Personal Daq) before connecting the USB cable. This allows
Personal Daq to inform the host computer (upon connection of the USB cable) that theunit requires minimal power from the computer.

Connecting Various Hardware Setups
Personal Daq data acquisition systems range from simple to complex. One example of a simple system isthat of one Personal Daq/54 connected to a PC’s USB connector. A much more complex system is one
that contains 100 Personal Daq/56 units, 100 PDQ expansion modules, and a combination of USB-powered
and self-powered hubs. Despite the wide range of possibilities in between, use of the following examples
should enable you to properly connect your system.
Note:

In the examples that follow, the USB hubs have four external ports (downstream ports). The
USB hubs used in your system may have more. Connections can be adjusted accordingly.
When using a power adapter with your Personal Daq system, be sure to supply power(from the adapter to the Personal Daq) before connecting the USB cable. This allows
Personal Daq to inform the host computer (upon connection of the USB cable) that theunit requires minimal power from the computer.

3-4

Hardware Setup

878695

Personal Daq User’s ManualExample 1: Direct Connection to Computer USB Port(s)In example 1 two Personal Daqs (and optional PDQ modules) are connected by cable to each of thecomputer’s USB ports. The number of USB connectors may vary from PC to PC. When you connect
Personal Daq units directly to a USB connector in this manner, no additional power source is requiredsince the computer’s USB connector power pins supply the Personal Daq and associated PDQ expansion
module with adequate power (500 mA at 4 to 5.25 V).

The use of certain notebook computers may require the use of a power adapter withyour Personal Daq.

Example 2: Connection to USB-Powered Hub

In example 2, four Personal Daqs (and optional PDQ modules) are connected by cable to individual ports
of a single USB-powered hub. Since the hub receives all its power from the computer’s USB, the hub
cannot supply adequate power to the Personal Daq units. Because of this aspect of insufficient power, each
Personal Daq is connected to its own power adapter.
Note:

The power adapters used must be capable of supplying at least 500 mA and have a voltage ratingof +6 to +16 VDC.

*Note: USB port locations vary from PC to PC.
When using a power adapter with your Personal Daq system, be sure to supply power(from the adapter to the Personal Daq) before connecting the USB cable. This allows
Personal Daq to inform the host computer (upon connection of the USB cable) that theunit requires minimal power from the computer.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878695

Hardware Setup

3-5

Example 3: Connections to Self-Powered and USB-Powered Hubs

Example 3 illustrates a system that makes use of six Personal Daq units and two different style USB hubs.
Three Personal Daqs (and optional PDQ modules) are connected by cable to individual ports of a selfpowered USB hub. In addition, the self-powered hub is connected to a downstream USB-powered hub,which is also connected to three Personal Daq units (and optional PDQ modules).
Notice that the Personal Daqs connected to the self-powered hub have no adapters connected to them. Thisis because the hub receives external power (in addition to the PC supplied USB power), which is capableof supporting the downstream devices connected directly to it. In comparison, the three Personal Daqs
connected to the USB-powered hub each require their own power adapter. As in example 2, the power
adapters used must be capable of supplying at least 500 mA and have a voltage rating of +6 to +16 VDC.
*Note: USB port locations vary from PC to PC.

3-6

Hardware Setup

878695

Personal Daq User’s ManualPersonal DaqView

4

Overview …… 4-2
Main Control Window …… 4-2
Toolbar Buttons …… 4-2
Pull-Down Menus …… 4-3

Channel Configuration Window …… 4-6
Channel Configuration Window Toolbar …… 4-6
Channel Configuration Window Pull-down Menus …… 4-6
Common Spreadsheet Columns …… 4-7
Analog Input Spreadsheet …… 4-10
Frequency/Pulse Input Spreadsheet …… 4-12
Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet …… 4-14
Configure Acquisition Dialog Box …… 4-15
Configure Data Destination and File Converter Preferences …… 4-18
Sequential Destinations (Auto Rearm) …… 4-19

Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters …… 4-20
Meter Toolbars …… 4-20
Meter Pull-Down Menus …… 4-21
Meters Configuration Menu …… 4-21
Configuring a Meter …… 4-22
Bar Graph Meters …… 4-24
Analog Meters …… 4-25
Digital Meters …… 4-26

Chart Display …… 4-27
Groups, Charts, & Channels …… 4-27
Chart Display Window …… 4-27
Pull-Down Menus …… 4-28
Toolbar Items …… 4-29
Chart and Channel Information Regions …… 4-29
Accessing the Display Configuration Setup Box …… 4-31
Editing a Chart Display Configuration …..4-31
Manually Configuring a Chart Display …. 4-33

Chart Setup Wizard …… 4-36
Introduction …… 4-36
Automatic Display Setup using the Chart Setup Wizard …… 4-38
Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup …… 4-38

Using Personal DaqView with Microsoft ExcelTM …… 4-39

Reference Note: This chapter serves as a reference for Personal DaqView and the Chart Setup Wizard
feature. For very first time start-up refer to Chapter 1 or the Personal Daq Quick Start document(p/n 491-0940). Chapter 1 and the Quick Start contain information for connecting hardware, loading
software, and acquiring data quickly.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-1

Overview
Personal DaqView is a graphic Microsoft Windows-based program that can be used for various dataacquisition applications. The program was designed for ease-of-use with no need for programming orexpertise in configuration.
Personal DaqView includes the following features:• Set up Analog Input Channels for acquiring various voltages or temperature•

Set up Frequency/Pulse Input Channels to measure various frequency-related parameters, e.g.,pulse rate, total pulses, pulses per scan, percentage high, percentage low•

Set up Digital I/O Channels for input or output•

Save acquired data to disk•

Transfer data to spreadsheets, data bases, and PostView•

View real-time data values in screen columns, scrolling charts, bar graph, analog, or digital meters•

Support for up to 100 Personal Daq devices attached to one PC•

Chart Setup Wizard feature you can make use of Simple, Moderate or Advanced automatic chart
creation functions•

Includes “add-ins” to Microsoft ExcelTM and can be run from within the Excel environment, using
Excel’s associated macros

Personal DaqView permits the use of multiple groups with up to four overlapping channels per chart. In
addition, the application allows you to make changes via a Chart Properties dialog box. The Chart
Properties box is discussed on page 4-28.
When using the Chart Setup Wizard feature you can make use of Simple, Moderate, or Advanced
automatic chart creation functions of the wizard. Discussion of the Chart Setup Wizard begins on page 436.

Main Control Window
When you first open Personal DaqView the Main Control and Channel Configuration Windows appear.
Note that this section pertains to the Main Control Window only; discussion of the Channel Configuration
Window begins on page 4-6.
The Main Control Window contains several pull-down menus, a toolbar composed of icon buttons, andinformation boxes for status, progress [number of scans], and file identification. Functions that can beobtained through the toolbar can also be obtained through the pull-down menus.

Toolbar Buttons

Main Control Window

4-2

ButtonFunction

1

Open Configuration File

Opens a selected configuration file.

2

Save Configuration File

Saves the current configuration file to disk.

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s Manual

3

Select Active Device

Provides a list of available devices, their serial number, and device type. A
checkmark appears next to the selected device. Use the mouse to select (ordeselect) a device. “Device” in this context can include an expansion module, forexample: a Personal Daq/55 with an attached PDQ1 would be one device.

4

Arm Trigger for Disk
RecordingArms the trigger and stores acquisition data to a designated disk file. If Auto Rearm isselected, clicking this button puts Auto rearm in effect. This button, is also used todisarm the data acquisition.

5

Manual Trigger

Used to trigger the device when the mode of trigger is set to “Manual.” Note that the
Manual Trigger button can not be depressed until after the trigger is armed, forexample, by first pressing button 4.

6

Update Digital Outputs

Updates digital outputs for all digital channels that are selected to “Output State.” See
Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet, page 4-14.
Digital I/O does not apply to Personal Daq/54.

7

Configure Data
Destination

Accesses the Configure Data Destination window (page 4-16). Note that this window
provides a means of selecting sequential destinations through an auto rearm feature.

8

Configure Acquisition

Accesses the Configure Acquisition window (page 4-15).

9

Configure Channel
Settings

Brings up the Channel Configuration window. From this window you can configure
channels for Analog Input (page 4-8), Frequency/Pulse Input (page 4-12), and Digital
Input/Output channels (page 4-14), depending on which tab is selected.

10

Update All Indicators

Starts all on-screen indicators with a display of up-to-date data. Has no affect on therecording of data to disk. Auto Rearm, even if selected, will not occur when using thiscontrol. This button is also used to pause all indicators.

11

Display Scrolling Charts

Displays data graphically in a scrolling chart. Discussion of Chart Display begins on
page 4-27.

12

Display Bar Meters

Displays data in a bar graph format. Discussed on page 4-24.

13

Display Analog Meters

Displays data displayed in a dial-gage format. Discussed on page 4-25.

14

Display Digital Meters

Displays data in a digital meter format. Discussed on page 4-26.

15

View Data

Launches an independent post-data acquisition program such as eZ-PostView.
Refer to the Post Acquisition Analysis PDF (included on your CD) for detailed
information.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-3

Pull-Down Menus
Aside from using the toolbar buttons to perform various program functions, you can select functions frompull-down lists as indicated by the following table.
Pull-Down Menu

FunctionFile
New (Ctrl+N)
Open (Ctrl+O)
Save (Ctrl+S)
Save As …
Exit (Ctrl+Q)

Provides a means to create a new file.
Provides a means to open an existing file.
Saves the current file under its present filename.
Copies the current file and saves it under a different filename.
Exits the program.

View
Active Devices …

Acquisition
Configuration…
Channel Configuration
Data Destination
Configuration …
Preferences …
(Preferences are
discussed in more detailon the following page)

Provides a list of available devices, their serial number, and device type. A checkmarkappears next to the selected device. Use the mouse to select (or deselect) a device.
“Device” in this context can include an expansion module, for example: a Personal
Daq/55 with an attached PDQ1 would be one device. Only one device can be active at
a time.
Brings up the Configure Acquisition window.
Opens the channel configuration window (if closed) with the Analog Input channels
spreadsheet selected.
Brings up the Data Destination dialog box for assigning the destination folder, andfilename. Also provides the option to select sequential destinations (Auto Rearm).
Opens a dialog box containing two tabs, with the following uses:
General tab: Provides a means to select various preference options regarding opening,
exiting, and saving files.
Measurements tab: Provides a means of setting default measurement units for voltage,
temperature, and frequency.

Preferences Dialog Boxes
You can set preferences for Personal DaqView through the Preferences dialog box found under the View
pull-down menu of the Main Control Window.

General − Allows you to select “untitled” or “pDaq” configurations for the default filename used by
Personal Daq. Note that Personal DaqView automatically loads the last saved configuration file. The
second part of the General screen pertains to configuration file settings.

Measurement Units − Allows you to set the desired default units for the Channel Configuration
Window’s spreadsheet. Note that scale and offset automatically reset to a pre-designated default according
to the unit selected.
Note:

4-4

Personal DaqView

Changing the measurement unit defaults does not immediately affect the Channel Configuration
Window’s spreadsheet columns. For example: If you set your voltage default to µV, but thechannels are set with V units, they will retain the V units. However, changing these channels totemperature, then back to voltage would result in the default units (µV) and the associated scale &989592

Personal Daq User’s Manualoffset. The new default units are also applied to all channels when a new configuration file iscreated.

AcquireArm
DisarmManual Trigger

Arms the trigger and stores acquisition data to a designated disk file. If Auto Rearm isselected, activating this funtion will put Auto rearm into effect.
Disarms and stops the data acquisition.
Used to trigger the device when the mode of trigger is set to “Manual.” Note that the
Manual Trigger can not be activated until after the trigger has been armed.

DeviceUpdate Digital Outputs
Save Power-up Settings

Updates digital output channels, regardless of whether their output state is closed or
opened (see page 4-14).
Saves power-up state settings of Personal Daq’s internal switches (see page 4-14).

Tools
Convert Binary Data …

View Data

The Convert Binary Data menu option allows you to convert raw binary data (*.bin files)
into other formats that you may find more useful. You must first select an existing binary
file to be converted. The filename can be typed in or selected by the Browse button that
leads to a folder/file search window. After a file is selected (or multiple files), you can
toggle check-boxes on/off for each format type. When ready to begin the conversion,
select the Convert button and set up the destination folder/filename.
Data collected can be uploaded to your PC’s hard disk in any or all of several data
formats for post-acquisition analysis. Some of the available file formats include Snap
Master, DADiSP, Matlab, and ASCII (Excel) which is compatible with most software foranalysis.
Launches an independent post-data acquisition program such as eZ-PostView.
Refer to the Post Acquisition Analysis PDF (included on your CD) for detailed
information.

Indicators
Start All Indicators
Stop All Indicators
Analog Meters
Bar Graph Meters
Chart Display
Digital Meters

Personal Daq User’s ManualStarts all on-screen indicators with a display of up-to-date data. Has no affect on therecording of data to disk. Auto Rearm, even if selected, will not occur when using thiscontrol.
Stops all indicators. Has no affect on the recording of data to disk.
Brings up the analog dial-type meters.
Brings up the bar graph type meters.
Brings up the scrolling chart.
Brings up the digital style meters.

989592

Personal DaqView

4-5

Help
Contents and Index

About Personal DaqView

Accesses the program’s Help file. Contents include:
Introduction
Setting Up Personal DaqView
Taking an Acquisition
Viewing Your Data
Frequently Asked Questions
Troubleshooting
Provides the program’s software version number.

Channel Configuration Window
You can bring up the Channel Configuration Window by using the Configure Channel Settings button (9)on the Main Control Window toolbar, or by selecting Channel Configuration from the Main Control
Window’s View pull-down menu.
The Channel Configuration Window contains a Control pull-down menu and a 2-button toolbar. The
window displays any one of three tabbed spreadsheets for selecting the type of channel to be configured.
The tabs are labeled Analog Input, Frequency/Pulse Input, and Digital Input/Output.

Channel Configuration Window, Selected for Analog Input Spreadsheet

Channel Configuration Window Toolbar
The Channel Configuration Window consists of two buttons (items 16 and 17) as identified by the previous
figure and the following table.
ButtonFunction

16

Enable Readings
ColumnActivates the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect therecording of data to disk.

17

Disable Readings
ColumnStops the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect therecording of data to disk.

Channel Configuration Window Pull-down Menu
The channel configuration window contains one pull-down menu labeled, Control. This menu provides ameans of enabling and disabling the readings column, as do toolbar items (16 and 17).

4-6

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualCommon Spreadsheet Columns
The Channel Configuration Window, regardless of which tab is active, consists of a spreadsheet designed
for the acquisition of a specific type of data (i.e., analog, frequency, digital). Depending on the column,
you can make changes to the information contained in a cell by placing the mouse cursor in the cell andthen using the applicable mouse-button methods as follows:•“Single-click” with the left mouse button to open an associated pull-down list for the applicable cell, fromwhich a selection can be made. This pull-down list appears just below the toolbar.

•“Double-click” with the left mouse button to cycle through listed selections or write-enable a cell, as
applicable. If the cell has a given parameter list (such as those in the On, Range, and Measurement Duration
columns) the parameter will change with each double-click, allowing you to cycle through all possible
selections. Note that these selections are repetitive; in other words, you will eventually advance to the same
selection you started with. “Type-in” cells (such as User Label, Scale, and Offset) can be selected on doubleclick for easy editing.

•“Single-click” left, then “Single-click” right to write-enable a cell. Completing this action with the mousebuttons (while having the cursor on a cell such as Scale or Offset) allows you to use you PC’s keypad to typethe desired value into the field.

•“Single-click” left, “single-click” right, then “single-click” left again to open an associated pull-down list
for the applicable cell, from which a selection can be made. This pull-down list appears in the selected cell’srow.

Note: Although each type of channel configuration spreadsheet (analog, frequency, and digital) is
discussed separately, the common columns are presented in this section to avoid redundancy.
Note: You can use your PC’s keypad arrow keys to select new “active cells” in the spreadsheet.

Physical Channel ⎯ automatically identifies the Personal Daq device and channel. The user cannotchange the "Physical Channel" nomenclature. A few examples are:
PD1_A01 - Personal Daq unit 1, Analog Input channel 1 --- a differential channel
PD1_A02L - Personal Daq unit 1, Analog Input channel 2, Low --- a single-ended channel, low end
PD1_A02H - Personal Daq unit 1, Analog Input channel 2, High --- a single-ended channel, high end
PD2_F1 - Personal Daq unit 2, Frequency/pulse channel 1
PD1_D05 - Personal Daq unit 1, Digital channel 5

User Label ⎯ provides a means of identifying the channel by a user-defined descriptive name. If noname is specified, the program uses the physical channel name as a default. The user label appears in thetrigger and chart selection lists, discussed later in this manual. You can change the user label to any
alphanumeric designation, providing each label is unique (channel-specific).

On ⎯ allows you to enable a channel for data collection. When a cell or block of cells in this column isselected, a selection box will appear that allows “On” to enable or “Off” to disable the channel. Doubleclicking a cell in this column toggles the channel’s enable status.

Reading ⎯ displays scanning device input readings. The column is activated when the acquisition device
is triggered. The column’s values are real-time channel values from the instrument and cannot be alteredby the user. This column will update the readings as fast as the computer will allow.
Note:

If you re-size the readings column such that it becomes too narrow for all digits to be displayed,
you may misinterpret the reading. For example, since the left-most digits will be lost from view
first, a reading of 8.388118 V could look like 8118 V (with the most significant didgits of 3.38
no longer visible).

Scale & Offset ⎯ The scale/offset feature applies to Analog Input and Frequency/Pulse Input
spreadsheets. This feature allows you to alter the default linear (mx + b) transfer function. These types ofalterations can be useful in special applications. An example follows shortly.
To change scale or offset values from default: use the mouse to select the spreadsheet cell (of theapplicable channel’s scale or offset), type in the desired value, and hit the enter key of your keypad. Notethat the scale is the linear relation to the input, sometimes referred to as m. Offset is plus or minus fromzero, the "b" of the mx + b linear equation.
Note: The reading and range columns will change automatically according to the new scale/offset
values.
The following examples illustrate possible uses of the scale/offset feature.
Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-7

Engineering Units Conversion Using mx + b
Most of our data acquisition products allow the user to convert a raw signal input (for example, one that isin volts) to a value that is in engineering units (for example, pressure in psi). The products accomplish thisby allowing the user to enter scale and offset numbers for each input channel, using the software associatedwith the product. Then the software uses these numbers to convert the raw signals into engineering units
using the following “mx + b” equation:

Engineering Units = m(Raw Signal) + b(1)

The user must, however, determine the proper values of scale (m) and offset (b) for the application inquestion. To do the calculation, the user needs to identify two known values: (1) the raw signal values, and(2) the engineering units that correspond to the raw signal values. After this, the scale and offset
parameters can be calculated by solving two equations for the two unknowns. This method is made clear
by the following example.
Example 1:
An engineer has a pressure transducer that produces a voltage output of 10.5 volts when the measured
pressure is 3200 psi. The same transducer produces an output of 0.5 volt when the pressure is 0 psi.
Knowing these facts, m and b are calculated as follows.
A - Write a pair of equations, representing the two known points:

3200 = m(10.5) + b(2)

0 = m(0.5) + b(3)

B - Solve for m by first subtracting each element in equation (3) from equation (2):3200 - 0 = m(10.5 – 0.5) + (b - b)
Simplifying gives you:This means:(4)3200 = m(10)(5)

m = 320(6)

C - Substitute the value for m into equation (3) to determine the value for b:So:

0 = 320 (0.5) + b(7)b = - 160

(8)

Now it is possible to rewrite the general equation (1) using the specific values for m and b that we justdetermined:

Engineering Units = 320(Raw Signal) - 160(9)

The user can then enter the values of m and b into the appropriate location using the facilities provided bycompatible data acquisition software, for example: WaveView, DaqView, Personal DaqView, LogView,
and TempView. The software uses equation (9) to calculate signal values in engineering units from thatpoint on.

4-8

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualExample 2:
A Personal Daq user knows that a linear relationship exists between the voltage output at "Point A" and thevoltage output at "Point B" in a certain electrical device. The linear relationship is constant. The user
wants to monitor the voltage at "Point B," however; it is inconvenient to connect signal lines in that sectionof the apparatus.
The user realizes he can take the reading at "Point A" and use the mx + b equation to solve for"Point B." In this example, BVolts = 1.2x + 0.75 Volts, where Bvolts is the voltage at "Point B" andx is the voltage at "Point A."
After his acquisition was configured, the user performed the following steps to allow
Personal DaqView to calculate and display BVolts.
1. Left-clicked/right-clicked on the units cell for PD1_A01, typed in B:Volts, and hit the
keyboard’s Enter key.
2. Left-clicked/right-clicked on the Scale cell for PD1_A01, typed 1.2 for the Scale, and hit
the keyboard's Enter key.
3. Left-clicked/right-clicked on the Offset cell for PD1_A01, typed 0.75 for the Offset, andhit the keyboard's Enter key.
4. Used channel PD1_A01 to acquire voltage readings which represented the voltage at"Point B" (B:Volts).
5. Selected the Digital Meters button (14) on the Main Control Window’s toolbar andconfigured the meter to display readings for PD1_A01 (B:Volts) and PD1_A02.
6. Clicked the Update All Indicators button (10) on the Main Control Window’s toolbar andmonitored the readings.

PD1_A01 B:Volts Readings resulting from use of the Scale/Offset Feature.
In this example B:Volts is being displayed on the Analog Input Spreadsheet and in a Digital Meter.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-9Analog Input Spreadsheet
The Analog Input spreadsheet allows you to configure analog input channels. Each row shows a single
channel and its configuration. The following text provides more detail regarding the channel configuration
parameters for Analog Input.
Note that columns labeled Physical Channel, User Label, On/Off, Reading, Scale, and Offset are discussed
in the immediately preceding section, Common Spreadsheet Columns.

Channel Configuration Window, Selected for Analog Input Spreadsheet

Range ⎯ Displays the range and provides access to a pull-down list of available voltage ranges, as well
as a list of available thermocouple types. In addition to voltage, analog input can be selected forthermocouple types J, K, T, E, R, S, B, and N. Note that the range and units columns are interrelated. For
example, selecting a thermocouple from the range list will automatically bring up the default unit indicatedin Preferences, Measurement Units in the View pull-down menu.

Units ⎯ Displays units and allows the user to key-in different units when the cell is selected. Units may
be V, mV, uV, or created special by the user (as in the B:volts example, page 4-9). In addition, when athermocouple type is selected from the range pull-down list, units of °C, °F, °K, or °R are possible. (Alsosee Scale & Offset, page 4-7).

Single-ended/Differential ⎯ Identifies the channel mode as single-ended or differential and is used tochange the mode configuration. When changing from differential to single-ended mode, a new channel
row is added, as well as a new default label. For example: Changing the mode of channel PD_1A01(Personal Daq Unit 1, Analog Channel 01) from differential to single-ended results in two channels withdefault Physical Channel labels and User Labels of PD_1A01L and PD_1A01H.
Single-ended inputs are typically used with signals that share the same common low (COM) such as
multiple batteries which have their negative sides connected in common. For Personal Daq applications,the single-ended mode is not to be used for thermocouples.
Differential inputs are required when signals do not share the same common low, such as in the typical useof thermocouples. A simple example showing two single-ended inputs (V1 and V2) and a differential
input (V3) follows.
Note that V1, V2 and V3 (from the following figure), correspond with the first three channels on theprevious screen shot. In the screen capture, V1 and V2 are shown to have “V” for units and are singleended. V3 a thermocouple with units of °C and is shown to be Differential.

4-10

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualSingle-Ended and Differential Connections to Analog Inputs

In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected single-ended. Doingso can result in noise and false readings. This is especially true when acquiring other highamplitude signals in conjunction with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.

Measurement Duration Column ⎯ Indicates the amount of time used for sampling a channel’s input
signal. The measurement durations range from very slow (610 milliseconds/sample) to very fast
(12.5 milliseconds/sample). Some related terms are defined as follows:
Sample rate – Samples per second. The sample rate is the number of samples that take place per second.
With a slow measurement duration of 610 milliseconds, there will only be 1.6 samples per second. With avery fast measurement duration of 12.5 milliseconds, there will be 80 samples per second.
Resolution (Bit RMS) – The number of reliable data bits that exist for a signal’s measurement. The greater
the resolution, the more detailed the reading, for example, with increased resolution a reading of 5.12 V
could become 5.11896 V. Personal Daq actually provides for 24 bits of data information; however, theaccuracy of the least significant bits becomes less as the measurement duration speeds up. At ameasurement duration of 610 milliseconds, the last two bits are considered unreliable, resulting in a
resolution of 22 bits. At a very fast measurement duration (12.5 milliseconds), the nine least significant
bits are unreliable, resulting in 15 bit accuracy.
Speed vs. Resolution1
Speed Designation

Very Slow, 50 / 60 Hz rejection
Slow, 50 Hz rejection
Slow, 60 Hz rejection
Medium, 50 Hz rejection
Medium, 60 Hz rejection
MediumFast
Very Fast
Notes:

Measurement
Duration(Scan Period)
610 ms
370 ms
310 ms
130 ms
110 ms
40 ms
20 ms
12.5 ms

Maximum
2
Sample Rate
(Samples/sec)
1.6 / sec
2.7 / sec
3.2 / sec
7.7 / sec
9.2 / sec
25 / sec
48 / sec
80 / sec

Resolution(Bits RMS)(-4 V to +4 V range)
22
22
22
21
21
19
17
15

1. Each channel can have independent measurement speed and resolution.
2. The sample rates shown were obtained with continuous self-calibration disabled.
The table values do not include the use of CJC measurements.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-11

When you select the measurement duration you also determine the maximum sample rate and resolution
for the applicable channel. For Personal Daq’s analog input applications, sample rates range from 1.6
samples/sec up to 80 samples/sec and corresponding resolution ranges from 22 to 15 bits.
The following table provides general advice regarding the selection of measurement duration.
Analog Input Signal
Variability

Measurement
Duration

SampleRate

Resolution

Steady, or gradualchange

long

low

high

Highly variable(unsteady)

short

high

low

Frequency/Pulse Input Spreadsheet[Does not apply to Personal Daq/54]
The Frequency/Pulse Input spreadsheet allows you to configure the related channels. Each row shows asingle channel and its configuration. Additional information regarding frequency measurement is includedin the Help file.

Channel Configuration Window, Selected for Frequency/Pulse Input Spreadsheet
The following text provides more detail regarding the frequency/pulse channel configuration parameters.
Note that columns labeled Physical Channel, User Label, On/Off, Reading, Scale, and Offset are discussed
in the section, Common Spreadsheet Columns.

Type ⎯ A block of cells in this column can be selected for convenience of single type selection, wheretype can be Frequency, Totalize, Pulses per Scan, or Duty Cycle (% High or % Low). The selected typedetermines the default units.

Units ⎯ Frequency type units can be Hz or kHz. Totalize and Pulses per Scan type units are Pulses; andDuty Cycle (% High and % Low) type units are %. Default units are set in the Preferences section of theMain Control Windows’s View pull-down menu.

Edge ⎯ Readings for Frequency, Totalize, and Pulses per Scan are based on successive rising [or falling]edges of the input signal, and on the time lapse between these signal edges (see Debounce). Eachchannel’s edge selection is independent of the others, i.e.; you can have some channels selected for risingedge while others are selected for falling edge.
Note: Depending on the application, one edge type (rising or falling) may be electronically cleaner
than the other.
Note: As indicated in the following text and figure, some edges are insignificant and can be ignored.

4-12

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualDebounce ⎯ Debouncing is a process of ignoring signals which are considered as too short in duration to
be real events. Personal Daq's debounce circuit ignores two types of edge signal events: 1) rising edges
that are not preceded by a sustained low signal, and 2) falling edges that are not preceded by a sustained
high signal. The interval can be independently set for each channel to a value of 0, 0.8, 3.2, or 13 ms. You
can select 0 ms to disable debouncing for clean high-frequency signals. Note that long debounce times will
limit high-frequency response. For example, a 13 ms debounce will limit frequency to about 50 Hz.
The following figure shows the effect of 13 ms debouncing on a noisy signal. To be counted, a rising edge
must be preceded by a sustained low signal for at least 13 ms without any other edges [a falling edge must
be preceded by a sustained high signal for at least 13 ms without any other edges]. (See following figure).

Sustained Lows and Rising Edges… "Bouncy" Input compared with Debounced Output

In the this example of “bouncy” input, edge was selected for rising and debounce was selected for 13 ms.
Rising edges a and f are counted because they are preceded by low signal levels sustained for at least 13
ms (the debounce time). All other rising edges (b, c, d, and e) are ignored.

Min Value ⎯ For Frequency, Pulses/scan, and Totalize, defines the minimum range value (lower range
limit) for the charted signal. The value is applicable to charts in Personal DaqView and PostView.

Max Value ⎯ For Frequency, Pulses/scan, and Totalize, defines the maximum range value (upper range
limit) for the charted signal. The value is applicable to charts in Personal DaqView and PostView.

Resolution and Settling Time
Frequency measurements on the Personal Daq are achieved by querying the unit for a current time andpulse count on a repetitive basis. Aside from edge and debounce settings, two values are used to set up
frequency input; Maximum Frequency (Fmax) and Measurement Resolution (Mreso). Both of thesevalues have units of Hertz.
The Acquisition Period (AcqPeriod) is calculated from these values. AcqPeriod is the minimum length oftime needed to get a reading at the desired resolution.
AcqPeriod (in seconds) = Fmax * (0.0000004 / Mreso)

However, if the requested scan period for the entire scan (of which the frequency channels are a part) islonger than the calculated AcqPeriod, then the scan period becomes the acquisition period.
To put bounding limits on values so measurements can be done in a timely fashion, the AcqPeriod must be<10 seconds. This means: Fmax / Mreso <25,000,000.
Frequency measurement on the Personal Daq is only done when collecting scans. Values are updated on
every scan even if the AcqPeriod has not been reached. During each scan a current pulse count and timer
count is read from the Personal Daq.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-13

The frequency is calculated as follows:
1) An estimated frequency (Fest) is calculated as follows:•

If there were no pulses read; Fest = Flast (the last frequency reported) or, Fest = 1 / current time
(whichever is smaller)•

If there were pulses counted then; Fest = counted pulses / current time2) The actual reported frequency (Frep) is calculated as follows:•

If current time <AcqPeriod then;Frep = [ [ Flast * (AcqPeriod - current time) ] + (Fest * current time) ] / [ AcqPeriod ]

•
Note:

Otherwise; Frep = Fest
Current Time is the elapsed time from the start of a frequency measurement and is reset each time
the AcqPeriod is reached.

Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet[Does not apply to Personal Daq/54]
The Digital Input/Output spreadsheet allows you to configure and monitor the related digital channels.
Each row shows a single channel and its configuration.

Channel Configuration Window, Selected for Digital Input/Output Spreadsheet
The following text provides more detail regarding the Digital Input/Output channel configuration
parameters. Note that columns labeled Physical Channel, User Label, On, and Reading are discussed in thesection, Common Spreadsheet Columns (page 4-7). The Scale and Offset feature does not apply to digitalchannels.

Input/Output Column ⎯ This column identifies the digital channel mode as input or output, and isused to select the desired mode.

Output State Column ⎯ When the output mode is selected, Personal Daq's physical internal switch
closes to ground. This 0 (Closed) switch position is the output state’s default setting. 0 (Closed) is
typically used for digital output logic applications, where logic output is low (0). In this state, digital
output is closed to ground.
When the digital output will be used to switch an external load, such as a relay, the output may be up to+5V (hi) and Personal Daq’s internal switch should be set to 1 (Open). In this use of the digital output, thecircuit is not closed to ground.
Note that since the reading column is for input values, the applicable reading cell is shaded-out when"output state" is selected.

4-14

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualWhen an active (On) channel is selected to “Output State” the Update Digital Outputs button (on theMain Control Window) becomes active. This button is used to update the digital output channels,
regardless of whether their output state is closed (0) or open (1).
Note: The update of changed output settings will not actually take place until the Update Digital Outputs
button is pressed. After selecting the digital output channels to the desired state (open or closed),
click on the Update Digital Outputs button to actually set the indicated output states.

Power-Up State Column ⎯ This column allows you to set Personal Daq’s physical internal switches tobe open or closed during power-up, on a per channel basis. After setting the state you can save theminternal to the device by opening the Main Control Window’s Device pull-down menu and selecting “Savepower-up settings.” When the device is unplugged or losses power, its internal switches will reset to the“saved” power-up settings.

Note: Saved power-up settings are internal to the Personal Daq device and are not retained by the
Personal DaqView software. If a device is removed from the PC and a different one is attached,
the new device will have its own power-up settings (default or pre-saved), but will not likely havethe same settings as the device which was just removed.
For enabled channels, Personal Daq’s digital I/O output state settings will change from their power-up
state designations after the device has been powered up. The changes take place as follows:•

For enabled digital Input channels - starting an acquisition will change the digital input channel, if
needed, to match the configuration set in the software.

•

For enabled digital Output channels - clicking on the Update Digital Outputs button will sets theindicated output state (displayed in the Output State column). When you change an output state you
must click on the Update Digital Outputs button before the output state actually changes.

Configure Acquisition Dialog Box
Note: Parameters can not be altered while the acquisition is in progress.
The information entered in the Configure Acquisition dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command
to set up the acquisition of data to disk. When the trigger is satisfied, the scans are collected at the selectedscan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file, as indicated in the Data Destination window. Data
Destination is discussed on page 4-18.
You can access the Configure Acquisition dialog box by using the Configure Acquisition button (icon with
the image of three slide-bars). This button is located on the toolbar the Main Control Window.
The Configure Acquisition dialog box contains three tabs: Pre-Trigger, Trigger, and Post-Trigger. When
first opened, the dialog box defaults to the Trigger tab selection. In addition to the trigger-related aspect,
the dialog box contains two other sections. These are labeled “Averaging” and “Acquisition Parameters.”

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-15

The Trigger Section
The following figure depicts the parts that make up an acquisition. Together, the pre-trigger andpost-trigger make up a trigger block.
Trigger

Pre-trigger
By duration or number of scans

Stop Event

Post-trigger
by duration, number of scans,or manual stoptime

Trigger Block

Configure Acquisition
As can be seen in the previous figure, it is relatively simple to configure an acquisition. Tabs allow you toselect each of the three trigger aspects (Trigger, Pre-Trigger, and Post-Trigger) for configuration.

Averaging
The “Averaging” section of the dialog box is used to enable a block averaging mode and to select the sizeof the scan block. Block averaging is enabled by using the Type list box (available selections are None orBlock Averaging). Averaging is available in scan blocks of 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32. The block number ischosen from the Count pull-down list. When enabled, the selected block averaging is applied to each of
the scan group’s analog input channels. Note that programmers can enable averaging via thedaqAdcSetFilter function with filterType set to DaftSWAvg. For additional information you can referto daqAdcSetFilter in Appendix B.

4-16

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualAcquisition Parameters
The lower section of the Configure Acquisition box is used for adjusting the scan rate, as well as enablingor disabling Continuous Calibration and Overrange Protection modes. Each of these categories isdiscussed below.
Scan Rate, Period, and Frequency
The lower region of the dialog box displays the maximum scan rate and the actual scan rate. This sectionof the dialog box allows you to set the scan timing, i.e., the rate at which Personal DaqView takes readings.
It can be set to a frequency (number of scans per second) or period (the time length of one scan) value.
The maximum scan rate depends on the channel configuration and is displayed in the configure acquisition
window. It is determined by the number of enabled channels and their measurement duration.
To get the highest scan rate possible:• turn off all unused channels• set the measurement duration to its lowest setting on all analog channels
These steps can be performed from the Channel Configuration Window (when selected for Analog Input
Spreadsheet). Setting the highest possible scan rate inversly affects the resolution of your analog channel
readings. When setting the scan rate, it is important to be aware of various issues that arise with a low scanrate. Among these are under sampling and aliasing.
Note:

The scan period can only change by increments of 1 msec. If you enter an invalid value,
Personal DaqView will automatically convert your entry to the nearest acceptable value.

Note:

Aliasing errors can result from having a scan rate that is too low (under sampling).

Continuous Calibration
The continuous calibration option is useful in applications that make use of very long acquisitions periods.
When the continuous calibration box is checked (9), Personal DaqView continuously calibrates the unit
while the acquisition is in progress. Although this provides greater reading accuracy, it can result in alowering of the maximum scan rate. For this reason the continuous calibration option has a default settingof disabled (unchecked).
Overrange Protection
By default, the overrange protection option is enabled. This is because certain ranges are slow to recoverfrom overload conditions. It should be noted that the slow recovery does not indicate any problem with theunit; however, if there is such an overload on a channel, erroneous readings on other channels may occur.
If your application presents the possibility of a channel overload, then you should keep the overrange
protection function enabled (9). If using a custom application, use the DcotpDaqOverrangeProtect
option-type setting with the daqSetOption API (see Appendix B for additional information regarding
daqSetOption).

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-17

Configure Data Destination and File Converter Preferences
Conversion of eZ-PostView, eZ-TimeView, or eZ-FrequencyView files is automatic. The fileconverter can be used to convert other data formats.
Note that PostView is not related to eZ-PostView.
The Configure Data Destination dialog box can be accessed from the View pull-down menu, or by using
the Configure Data Destination toolbar button (depicted in the upper left-hand corner of the following
figure). The button is located in the toolbar of the Main Control Window.

Configure Data Destination

File Converter Preferences(Accessed via the <Conversion Formats> button)

A breakdown of the dialog box follows.
Folder − The “Folder” text box determines the file’s destination folder.
File − The “File” text box identifies the file by name and raw binary extension (.BIN). Note that thesefilenames must have a raw binary (.BIN) extension. If you omit the extension, Personal DaqView will add
it to the filename.
Browse − Used to browse existing folders and filenames.
Conversion Formats – This button is used to access the File Converter Preferences dialog box. This box
provides a means of saving files in a variety of formats, including, but not limited to: DIAdem (.R32),
ASCII (.TXT), DADiSP (.DAT), DASYLab (.DDF), and PostView Binary (.IOT) formats. The File
Converter also allows you to add timestamps to the ASCII Text files.

4-18

Note:

If you plan to use PostView, it is important that PostView Binary and/or ASCII is selected.

Note:Parameters can not be altered while the acquisition is in progress.

Note:

The file’s data format is selected in the View pull-down menu (of the Main Control Window),
under Preferences, Data Convert. DIAdem (.R32) is selected by default. If you want to use
PostView to view your data Ensure ASCII (.TXT) or PostView Binary (.IOT) is selected.

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualYou can select Convert Binary Data from the Tools pull-down menu to bring up the following dialog box.
This allows you to select a file for conversion. The Formats button accesses the File Converter
Preferences Dialog Box.

The Select Files to Convert Dialog Box[Accessed from the Tools Pull-down Menu]

Sequential Destinations (Auto Rearm)
The right-hand portion of the Configure Data Destination dialog box is used to activate a Sequential
Destinations (Auto Rearm) feature. This feature allows for a large number of acquisitions to take place
automatically, with each using the same configuration settings. With this feature, as soon as a trigger blockis terminated the acquisition system immediately re-arms and waits for the trigger to be satisfied.
To use Auto Rearm:
1. Set your file conversion preferences.
2. Verify that the Acquisition is configured as desired.
3. Ensure Post-trigger is set to stop on a duration.
4. Check the Auto Rearm box [located on the right-hand side of
the Configure Data Destination box].
5. Enter the starting and ending index values for the files.
6. Select OK.
7. Start recording data to disk.
When the acquisition is complete, automatic rearm will occur andthe next sequential file will be recorded to disk. The acquisitions
will stop once all files (from the starting to ending index,
inclusive) have been recorded.

Setting Auto Rearm

Why use Auto Rearm?
Auto Rearm is a convenient way to monitor and analyze specific types of trigger events. For example, you
could set PD1_A01 going above 30°C as a trigger, set a post-trigger duration of one hour, and then use
Auto Rearm to have an additional 99 acquisitions with this same trigger criteria (PD1_A01 > 30°C andpost-trigger of one-hour). Each of the data acquisitions will occur automatically with no need to recreate
the acquisition setup or restart the acquisition.

Disabling Auto Rearm
To disable Auto Rearm simply deselect the feature. Note that deselected is the default setting of theAuto Rearm function.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-19

Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters
This section pertains to channel data display screens (windows, or dialog boxes) which are often referred toas DaqMeters. In Personal DaqView, the meters are accessed from the Main Control Window’s toolbar or
Main Control Window’s Indicators pull-down menu.
It is important to realize that for each type of meter discussed, the meter channels selected are independentof the group chart assignments, and of the assignments for the other meters.
Note that when using meters, placing the mouse pointer over an item and then hitting Ctrl+F1 (on the
keyboard) will cause a help statement to appear for that item, if such a statement is available.

Meter Toolbars
The toolbars for the three meter-types are identical, with exception that the Digital Meters toolbar does nothave a Reset Peak Hold button (item C in the following figure).

Meters Toolbar Buttons
Item
A

Label
Start

Function
Activates the meter. Does not affect the recording of data to disk.

B

Stop

Stops the meter. Does not affect the recording of data to disk.

C

Reset Peak Hold

Resets the floating markers, which indicate high and low reading peaks. Upon
reset, the markers will instantly adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values
reached since the time of the reset.

D

Stay on Top

E

Print

Sends the meter display image to connected printer.

F

Rows x Columns

Opens a small menu with “row x column” arrangement options. Example: Whenthe number of meters is 6 the grid options will be: 6x1, 3x2, 2x3, and 2x4 withthe first number being the number of rows. If you then select 3x2 you will have 3
rows of meters with 2 meters per row.

G

Select the number ofMeters to display

Specifies the number of meters to appear on the screen.
A maximum number of 32 meters can be selected.

This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters.

4-20

Personal DaqView

Locks or unlocks the meter’s position. When locked, the meter will appear on topof other windows and will retain the "on top" relationship.

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualMeter Pull-Down Menus
The meter windows each have Control and View pull-down menus, as indicated by the following figure.
The functions of these menus can also be implemented by using the meter toolbar buttons.

Meter Pull-Down Menu Options

Meters Configuration Menu
A meters configuration menu (lower left corner of following figure) will appear when you place the mousepointer over a meter and click the right-hand mouse button. The menu allows you to access various dialog
boxes for changing parameters for an individual meter, or simultaneously for a group of meters. The steps
for configuring a meter are detailed below.
Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital
Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.
Note: When the Misc., Scale, or Limits dialog box is active, clicking on the "More>>" button causes ameters extension area to be displayed. This allows you to extend the assigned meter characteristics
to additional meters of the same type. An example of the meters extension box is shown in theupper right corner of the following figure.

Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-21

Configuring a Meter
1.
2.
3.

Bring up the desired meter group (Bar Graph, Analog, or Digital).
Place the mouse cursor over the meter, which you desire to reconfigure.
Click on the right mouse button. A Meters Configuration Menu, similar to that in the above previous
figure, will appear.
Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital
Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.

4.
5.

Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu.
If a dialog box is required, for example, to change a limit, simply enter in the new value in the appropriate
parameter box and press “Apply” or “OK.” Pressing “Apply” implements your changes, but keeps the
dialog box open, allowing you to make additional changes. Pressing “OK” implements your changes andcloses the dialog box.
Note:

If you desire to give two or more meters the same attributes you can click on the "More>>" button
to activate the meters extension box, then highlight the meters for which you want the attributes toapply. This feature only applies to meters that are of the same type; for example, meter attributesof a Bar Graph Meter will not carry over to attributes of an Analog or Digital Meter.

The preceding figure and following table serve as a quick reference to meters configuration.
Configure Meter Settings, Function Descriptions
Function

Description

1

Select Channel

Select a new channel for display. The selected channel will replace the one
currently seen in the meter. Note that double-clicking the left mouse button in themeter region will also bring up a dialog box, which allows you to select a newchannel.

2

Set Scale

Set the high and low points of the scale, as well as define the decimal place format.
See following figure.

3

Show Peak
Hold Indicators

Places high and low uni-directional floating markers on the scale to indicate thehighest and lowest values reached up to the present time. This feature does not
apply to the Digital Meters selection. (See following figure).
Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly adjust to indicate
the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset. This featuredoes not apply to the Digital Meters selection. (See following figure).
Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend. Note that during rapid meter
fluctuations the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink simultaneously.
(See following figure).

Reset Peak
Hold
4Show Trend
Indicator

5

Set Limits

Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set points.

Show Limits

Displays limits by adding color (red for high, blue for low) to the scale regions, whichequal and exceed the set limit values. For Digital Meters: reaching or exceeding thehigh limit is indicated by red numbers and an upper red bar; reaching or exceeding
the low limit (in the negative direction) is indicated by blue numbers and a lower blue
bar. In addition, for Bar Graphs the indicator tip turns red for high limits and blue forlow limit conditions. For Analog Meters the dial arm’s pivot point displays red or blue
to indicate high or low limit (respectively).

Properties
More>>

Allows setting and showing limits, as well as opening the Scale dialog box.
The More>> button brings up a meters extension box. This allows you to selectseveral channels for which you want to assign the same meter attributes. Without
this feature each meter would have to be adjusted individually. This feature only
applies to meters that are of the same type; e.g., meter attributes of a Bar Graph
Meter will not carry over to attributes of an Analog or Digital Meter.

6
7

4-22

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualConfigure Meter Settings, Function Descriptions

Note 1: Bar Graph Meter withindicator rising in the high limit.
Meter tip is red to indicate “value isabove high limit.”
Note 2: Analog Meter withindicator rising in the high limit.
Pivot point of dial arm is red toindicate “value is above high limit.”
Note 3: Digital Meter with risingvalue in the high limit. The digital
readout is red (and has a red line
above it) to indicate “value isabove high limit.”
Each of the meters (shown in the
figure) shows a trend indicator
pointing in the increase direction.
The Bar Graph and Analog Meters
also show low and high peak holdindicators (at the 0 and 100
marks).

Three Meters with High and Low Limits Set
Be aware that the acquisition of data-to-disk has a higher priority then the updating of Charts, Meters, andthe Reading column. Therefore, data is displayed as soon as the acquisition task is satisfied. As the scanrate is increased, the acquisition-to-disk task will take up more processor (CPU) time and the displaying ofdata will be updated as time allows. If you select a linear conversion (using the scale & offset feature) you
should expect a further impact on real time display performance. Scale & offset conversion is discussed
on page 4-7.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-23

Bar Graph Meters
Selecting the Bar Graph Meters (from toolbar button or Indicators pull-down menu) brings up the Bar
Graph window. This window displays several channels in bar graph format. To activate the display, selectthe Start button from this window’s toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On)channel. You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Bargraph Meters, Shown with 2 Meters Selected for Viewing
Note 1: Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meter scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up
menu (item H). A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration popup menu (item I). Both of these pop-up menus were discussed in the section, Meters Configuration Menu,
page 4-21.
The items in the above figure as follows:
A- Start
B- Stop
C- Reset Peak Hold Indicators
D- Stay on Top
E- Print
F- Rows x Columns
G- Select the number of Meters to be displayed
H- Channel Selection box (Activated by double-clicking left mouse button in a meter's scale area)
IConfiguration Pop-Up Menu (Activated with a single click of the right mouse button in a meter's
scale area)
Configuration Note:…. for Bar Graph Meters
Configure the Bar Graph meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within themeter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard toscale, limits, channel selection, adding peak hold indicators, etc. Refer to Meters Configuration
Menu (page 4-21) for more detail.

4-24

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualAnalog Meters
Selecting the Analog Meters (from toolbar button or Indicators pull-down menu) brings up the Analog
Meters window. This window displays several channels in a dial/gage format. To activate the display,
select the Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel.
You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Analog Meters, Shown with 4 Meters Selected for Viewing
Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up menu
(see Bar Graph Meters, item H). A single-click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up aconfiguration pop-up menu (see Bar Graph Meters, item I). Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in
the section, Meters Configuration Menu, page 4-21.
Note that Meter #1 (for PD1_A01 in the above figure) shows the following:• Visible low limit region (< 32°C) and visible high limit region (> 75°C)• Peak indicators (at 0.00 and 100.00°C)• Trend indicator, increasing signal
The items in the above figure as follows:
A- Start
B- Stop
C- Reset Peak Hold Indicators
D- Stay on Top
E- Print
F- Rows x Columns
G- Select the number of Meters to be displayedNote:

You can activate a Channel Selection box by double-clicking left mouse button in a meter's scale
area. You can activate a Configuration Pop-Up Menu with a single click of the right mousebutton in a meter's scale area. Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in the section, Meters
Configuration Menu, page 4-21.

Configuration Note:…. for Analog Meters
Configure the Analog Meters settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within themeter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard toscale, limits, channel selection, adding peak hold indicators, etc. Refer to Meters Configuration
Menu (page 4-21) for more detail.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-25

Digital Meters
Selecting the Digital Meters (from toolbar button or Indicators pull-down menu) brings up the Digital
Meters window to display several channels in numeric format. To activate the display, select the Start
button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You can select toview up to 32 meters at a given time.

Digital Meters, Shown with 5 Meters Selected for Viewing
Note: Due to transducer and transient noises, the accuracy of voltage readings is ± 0.02%. Temperatureaccuracy varies, depending on thermocouple type; with type J having ± 0.5°C for a range of-100°C to +760°C. For your application, please refer to the proper specifications, including
thermocouple type, when applicable.
Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up menu
(see Bar Graph Meters, item H). A single-click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up aconfiguration pop-up menu (see Bar Graph Meters, item I). Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in
the section, Meters Configuration Menu, page 4-21.
Note that Meter #1 (for PD1_A01 in the above figure) is displaying a trend indicator (in the increase
direction) and also shows that the reading (91.45) is in high limit region. The number 91.45 is red andcontains a red bar over it.
The items in the above figure as follows:
A- Start
B- StopC- n/aD- Stay on Top
E- Print
F- Rows x Columns
G- Select the number of Meters to be displayedNote:

You can activate a Channel Selection box by double-clicking left mouse button in a meter's scale
area. You can activate a Configuration Pop-Up Menu with a single click of the right mousebutton in a meter's scale area. Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in the section, Meters
Configuration Menu, page 4-21.

Configuration Note:…. For Digital Meters

Configure the Digital Meters settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within thedigital meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter inregard to scale, limits, channel selection, etc. Refer to the Configure Meter Settings (page 4-21 ) for
more detail.
4-26

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Chart Display
Reference Note: For your very first chart display setup, or when the configuration filehas been deleted, refer to the Chart Setup Wizard section beginning on page 4-36.
Personal DaqView permits the use of multiple groups with up to four overlapping channels per chart; andcan make use of Simple, Moderate or Advanced automatic chart creation functions of the wizard.
Discussion of the Chart Setup Wizard begins on page 4-36.

Groups, Charts, & Channels
Before continuing with this section, it is important that you understandthe chart display structure in terms of groups, charts and channels.
Group refers to a group of charts. Note that Personal DaqView allows
up to 64 groups, depending on the capabilities of your PC, but can only
display one group at a time.
Chart refers to display area, which reflects real-time channel data
values for a selected channel and can be scrolled at various rates. You
can assign up to 16 charts per group. The application can display up to
four overlapping channels per chart.
Channel refers to a signal channel. Channels will be displayed in units
of °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, V, Hz, or kHz, depending on the configuration.
When starting the program with no configuration file present, Personal
DaqView creates a display configuration of one group, one chart, andone channel (the first active channel found). You can change your chart
display configuration through use of a dialog box or Chart Setup
Wizard. See pages 4-31 and 4-36 respectively.

Chart Display Window
The Chart Display Window allows you to view scrolling charts for selected channels in real time. You canaccess this window by selecting the Display Scrolling Charts button (located in the toolbar of the Main
Control Window). The Chart Display window contains four Pull-down menus, a toolbar, chart region, andchannel information region.

Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window
Note: A discussion of the numbered buttons and regions begins on page 4-29.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-27

Pull-Down Menus
Pull-Down Menu

Function

Chart
Wizard (Ctrl+W)
Setup (Ctrl+D)
Next Group(Ctrl+G)
Faster (Ctrl+Z)
Slower (Ctrl+X)
Zoom
Properties

Opens Chart Setup Wizard for manual or automatic configuration of the chart display. Detailed
discussion of the Chart Setup Wizard begins on page 4-36.
Accesses the Display Configuration Setup dialog box for normal editing of the current chart
display configuration. See page 4-31, Set Up Charts.
Selects the next available chart group.
Increases the chart scroll rate, as does the toolbar’s rabbit button.
Decreases the chart scroll rate, as does the toolbar’s turtle button.
When more than one chart is displayed, this feature allows you to zoom in on one of thecharts, such that only the selected chart is displayed. From this “zoomed state” you can use
the feature to return the display to normal (Un-zoom), or to select another available chart.
Grids – Turns grid lines on or off for the indicated chart.
Timestamp – Allows selection of absolute or relative timestamps; andprovides a means of turning off the timestamp.
Scroll Rate - Sometimes referred to as “chart speed.” Selects the indicatedchart’s scroll rate in “time per division.” Scroll rate can be as fast as 0.1
sec/div and as slow as 1 hour/div, with several other rates to choose
from. The rabbit and turtle buttons, and Faster (Ctrl+Z) and Slower(Ctrl+X) commands also affect scroll rate.
Note: The rate indicated in area 18 of the Chart Display figure[above] is the “global” scroll rate. It is not necessarily the same as
the scroll rate set in the chart’s Properties box.
Limit Lines – Allows limit lines (marking the upper and lower limits of thechart) to be displayed as solid or dotted lines; and provides a means ofturning the limit lines off.

Properties Box
Close

Exits the Chart pull-down menu.

AcquireStart Charts
Display
Stop Charts
Display

Starts the scrolling chart display. Does not affect the recording of data to disk.
Stops the scrolling chart display. Does not affect the recording of data to disk.

View
Grid Limit Lines
Grid Lines

Used to show or hide the grid limit lines.
Used to show or hide the grid lines.

Timestamp
Absolute (Ctrl+F4)
Relative (Ctrl+F5)
Off (Ctrl+F6)

Selects absolute time for the timestamp.
Selects relative time for the timestamp
Turns the timestamp off.

Note: Many of the menu functions can be achieved by using the appropriate toolbar buttons. Thesebuttons are discussed in the following text.

4-28

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualToolbar Items

ButtonFunction

1

Group Select2Start Charts
Display
Stop Charts
Display
Scroll Faster
Scroll Slower

Indicates the current chart group. Clicking on the down arrow (W) reveals other available
groups. To select a different chart group, simply pull down the group list and select thedesired group. The group list can be obtained by any of the control options: a) clicking
the down arrow (W), b) using Ctrl + G on the keyboard, c) using the keyboard up or downarrow key, d) using the page up or page down key. If using a control option other than“a,” you may need to select the group select box by repeatable pressing the keyboard’s
Tab key until the group select box is selected. When this happens, the name of thecurrently selected group appears in white on a dark background.
Starts the scrolling chart display. Does not affect the recording of data to disk.

3
4
5

6

Setup Charts

7

Chart Setup Wizard

8

Print Chart Display

Stops the scrolling chart display. Does not affect the recording of data to disk.
Buttons 4 and 5 provide a means of changing the chart’s scroll rate (chart speed). These
two buttons do not affect the scan rates of the acquisition device. The “global” scroll rate
(chart speed) is indicated in the lower right-hand corner of the Chart Display Window astime/div. Possible chart speeds are indicated in the table below.
Note: The “global” scroll rate is not necessarilly the same as the chart’s “actual”
scroll rate (as set in the chart’s Properties dialog box). The Properties box
is accessed through the Chart pull-down menu. The table on page 4-28
includes a screen capture.
Available Chart Speeds (Scroll Rates)
0.1 sec/div

1 sec/div

10 sec/div

2 min/div

30 min/div

0.2 sec/div

2 sec/div

30 sec/div

5 min/div

1 hr/div

0.5 sec/div

5 sec/div

1 min/div

10 min/div

Accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box. See page 4-31 for detailed
information.
Opens Chart Setup Wizard for manual or automatic configuration of the chart display.
Detailed discussion of the Chart Setup Wizard begins on page 4-36.
Sends the displayed chart to the printer.

Chart and Channel Information Regions
Channels can return values in engineering units of °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, V, Hz, kHz, or user defined units.
With exception of user defined units, engineering units depend on the configuration, for example, whether
a voltage type or temperature type sensor is being used. The Channel Information Region is located on theright-hand side of Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window. The values displayed in this region are thereal-time values of the selected channel.
By clicking on the up or down arrows (V, or W) by the channel selection box (item 10), you can select oneof a maximum of 4 channels that were assigned to that chart. This allows you to observe the chart-related
information for that specific channel. You can also select a new channel for the information region byplacing the cursor in (or tabbing over to) the “Center” or “Units/Div” fields and then pressing PageUp or
PageDown. This is particularly useful when your Chart Display Window has been re-sized such that thechannel selection boxes are not visible.
The following list identifies areas of the channel information region.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-29

Channel Information Region
Item

Description
The value at the upper grid limit line. This is the value at the high end of the scale.

10

Chart Maximum Scale
Value (Grid Limit Line)
Channel Selection

11
12

Present Value
Center13

Units/Division (Provides
the vertical increment of
one grid box)

The units in units/div can be °C, °F, °K, °R, µV, mV, V, kHz, or Hz. The divisionreferenced is one vertical grid. In the example above for PD1_A02, each verticalgrid increment represents 4.876 V per division. Changing the units/division spinnercontrols (V/W) will result in an automatic adjustment of the max scale and min scalevalues (items 9 and 14). Aside from using the units/div triangular controls to change
the value, you can change units/div by placing the mouse cursor in (or tabbing overto) the field and then either typing in the desired value, or using the PC keyboard
arrow control keys.

14

Chart Minimum Scale
Value (Grid Limit Line)The value at the lower grid limit line. This is the value at the low end of the scale.

15
16Multiply (x2), andDivide (÷2)

The Multiply(x2) push-button increases the size of the selected channel’s chart by afactor of 2, while automatically adjusting the chart’s high and low values. Aside from“clicking” on the Multiply/Divide controls, you can use your keyboard spacebar tocontrol this feature once the button (15 or 16) is selected. Selection may be withmouse, or by tabbing over to the control.
Making changes to a channel’s chart parameters does not affect the parameters of
the other channels, with the following exception: Holding the keyboard’s control key
down while adjusting either spinner (V/W) for center (item 12), or spinner forunits/div (item 13) causes the parameter change to apply to all channels for the chart(not just the currently selected channel display). This feature applies to the spinners
and keyboard up and down arrow keys, but not to the text input.

17

Scrolling Time

Scrolling Time is turned On or Off from the Timestamp pull-down menu. Time
Stamp can be “absolute” (real time) or “relative.” Absolute time is based on yourcomputer clock, whereas relative time starts at 00:00:00 hours/minutes/seconds, andthen continues timing in increments relative to the Scroll Rate. The chart’s scroll rate
can be set in the chart’s Properties box, accessed through the Chart pull-downmenu. Also see Properties in the table on page 4-28.

18

Global Scroll Rate

The “global” scroll rate consists of a “time per division” value which can be changed
using the “faster” (rabbit) button or “slower” (turtle) button. Available Scroll Rates arefrom 0.1 sec/div to 1 hour/div, as indicated in the table on page 4-29.
The “global” scroll rate is not necessarilly the same as the chart’s “actual” scroll rate
(as set in the chart’s Properties dialog box). The Properties box is accessed throughthe Chart pull-down menu.

9

4-30

Personal DaqView

Used to select the channel (of chart group's available channels) for which theinformation will be displayed. Displays the label of the channel for which information
is being displayed.
The real-time value of the selected channel.
Used to display (and change) the value of the selected channel’s chart centerline.
Changing the value of center results in an automatic change of the chart’s high andlow end values (items 9 and 14, and possibly an automatic change of the units/div(item 13). Aside from using the center spinner controls to change center, you canchange the center value by placing the mouse cursor in (or tabbing over to) the field
and then either typing in the desired value, or using the PC keyboard up and downarrow control keys.

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualAccessing the Display Configuration Setup Box
The Set Up Charts button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box. This box will also be
displayed if: a) you select Create Charts Manually during use of the Wizard Chart Setup program, b) you
select Setup from the Chart pull-down menu, c) you right-click on the chart region in Personal DaqView’s
Chart Display Window.
Note: If multiple chart groups are present in the display configuration, the current group will be selectedin the display configuration tree.
When you first click on the Set Up Charts button, a Display Configuration Setup box appears. A display
region shows the configured structure of the groups, charts, and channels. From this box you can select the
number of charts to be assigned to a specific group. With the use of the mouse cursor you can also select achart or channel for additional editing. In addition to the text presented in the following sub-sections:
Normal Edit and Manually Creating a Display, you can refer to the Chart Setup Wizard section,
beginning on page 4-36.
Reference Note: For your very first chart display setup, or when the configuration file has been
deleted, refer to the Chart Setup Wizard section beginning on page 4-36.
The method you use to access the Display Configuration Setup window makes a difference. When you use
the toolbar button or the pull-down menu’s Setup selection, the Display Configuration Setup window
appears with the current chart display configuration intact. With this type of access you would simply edit
your existing chart display. Channel configurations do not change, with exception that newly displayed
channels will be enabled.
When you access the Display Configuration Setup from the Chart Setup Wizard, the Display Configuration
Setup window appears with no existing display. This allows for a “clean slate” approach to creating a chart
display, as opposed to an “editing” approach. Channel configurations do not change, with exception that
newly displayed channels will be enabled.

Editing a Chart Display Configuration

Display Configuration Setup Dialog Box with an Existing Configuration
To explain editing a configuration, we make use of an example in which assumes you want to edit Chart 1.
In the following figure, Chart 1 was highlighted by clicking on it with the cursor. The Display
Configuration Setup box then changed, allowing you to see specific channel types (such as volts only) or to“Show all Types,” as in the example.
From this setup box you can add or delete charts and channels. You can:•••use the Shift or Ctrl key in conjunction with the cursor to select several channels for addition or deletion
double-click on an available channel to add it to the selected channels
double-click on a selected channel to remove it from the selected channels list

Note: When a chart contains overlapping channels with identical points of measurement, the channels thatare listed lower in the display will obscure the channels that are listed higher. In other words, thecharted points of newer channels will obscure points of equal value on the older channels.
Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-31

Adding Channels to Group 2, Chart 2
Another variation of the Display Configuration Setup box appears when you highlight a channel. In thefollowing figure, channel PD1_AO1 (of Chart 1, Group 1) was selected, resulting in a new screen image.
From this screen you can edit the channel setup.

Changing the Configuration of Channel PD1_A01
Personal DaqView data channels can operate in one of two modes: Units Full Scale or, Units/Div. The
mode is selected by radio button.
Units Full Scale. When Units Full Scale is selected, as depicted in the above figure, you can alter Y Max
and Y Min. These are the upper and lower limits of the Channel as they will appear on the chart when thechannel is selected. When you change either parameter, Y Center and Units/Division are automaticallyadjusted. You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units/Division while “Units Full Scale” is selected. You
can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows, or by highlighting the existing value,
typing in the new value, the pressing “Enter” on your PC keyboard.
Note:

4-32

Personal DaqView

If the window size is changed, a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its
full scale setting across the chart.

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualUnits/Div. When Units/Div. is selected you can alter Y Center and Units/Div. Y Center is the centerline
value of the chart when the channel is selected. Units/Div. is the vertical value of on chart grid increment.
When you change Y Center or Units/Div. Y Max and Y Min are automatically adjusted. You can notdirectly adjust Y Max or Y Min while “Units/Div.” Is selected. You can change Y Center and Units/Div.
by using the up and down arrows, or by highlighting the existing value, typing in the new value, thepressing “Enter” on your PC keyboard.
Note:

If the window size is changed, a chart operating in the Units/Div. Mode will maintain its
units per division scale setting across the chart.

The channels in the display setup you create will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on
Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window. The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will
be visible when the applicable Group is selected. Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at atime.
It is important to understand that other channels (those not in the display setup) maintain their existing
configuration status. They are not affected by the edit of the configuration display.
You can enable additional channels from the Channel configuration window. Enabling additional channels
allows you to acquire more data; however, it will not change your display on Personal DaqView’s Chart
Display Window. In other words, you can also acquire data from channels, which you do not monitor.

Manually Configuring a Chart Display
If you plan to have a chart setup which is not weighted evenly, i.e., different numbers of channels per chartand different numbers of charts per group, you may want to manually setup your chart display fromscratch, that is, without beginning from a pre-existing display configuration. This method is arrived atfrom the Chart Setup Wizard window by clicking on the Manual Chart Setup, Create Charts button. When
this button is clicked, the program exits the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the manual method of Display
Configuration Setup. Although this method is referred to as “manual,” it still contains some automaticelements, such as Automatically Add Groups to the Setup.
Note:

Even if an unevenly distributed chart display is desired, you can always edit a pre-existing chart
setup, or create a new setup by one of the Chart Setup Wizard’s automatic methods, and then edit
the setup.

To manually setup your chart display using the clean slate approach (as opposed to editing an existing
display) perform the following steps.
1.

Select the Chart Setup Wizard from the Charts pull-down menu of Personal DaqView’s Chart
Display Window. The Wizard setup window appears (see following figure).

2.

Click on the Manual Chart Setup, Create Charts button. The Display Configuration Setup box
appears. Since the previous display configuration was reset, no groups or charts are seen in thedisplay area on the left side of the screen.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-33

Display Configuration Setup, A “Clean Slate” Approach3.

As seen in the previous figure for the “Clean Slate” approach, you have two options at this point.
Perform (3a) or (3b) as appropriate. Option (3a) is typically used.
(3a) Automatically add groups to the setup. Enter the number of groups and charts desired by using
the cursor and typing in the value, or by using the pull-down arrows (W) and making theappropriate selections; then click on the Create Groups button.
(3b) Manually add groups to the setup. Type in the name of the chart group; then click on the
Add Display Group button.
The Display Configuration Setup screen changes to show chart groups, and the number of charts
for the selected (black highlighted) chart group. From this screen you can change the number ofcharts in a group, as well as change the group name.

Adding one Chart to Group 1

4-34

4.

Change the number of charts per group if desired.

5.

Change the group name if desired.

6.

Click on a group to see the chart(s) assigned to the group. In the above example there is one groupwith one chart.

7.

Click on a chart to assign channels to the chart. A screen similar to the following will appear.

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Assigning Channels to Group 1, Chart 1
8.

Choose channels for the selected chart. You can select up to 4 overlapping channels per chart. Add ordelete channels as follows:•

Highlight an available channel using the cursor and left-hand mouse button; then click
the Add button. Repeat for each channel to be added.

•

Double-click on a channel in the available channels list to add the channel to the display.

•

Double-click on a channel in the selected channels list to remove the channel from thedisplay.

•

Hold down the keyboard’s Shift Key and use the left-hand mouse button to select a blockof consecutive available channels (up to 4); then click the Add button. Example:
PD1_A03, PD1_A04, PD1_A05, PD1_A06.

•

Hold down the keyboard’s Ctrl button and use the left-hand mouse button to select up to
4 available channels (these can be non-consecutive); then click the Add button.
Example: PD1_A01, PD1_A03, PD1_A05, PD1_A07.
Note:

You can also remove channels in a similar manner by highlighting a channel(s) in the Selected
Channels box, and then clicking on the Remove button.

Note:

When a chart contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that theirtraces reside on top of each other, then the channels that are listed lower in the display
list (the most recently added channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list (those whichwere added first).

9.

In the display area (on the left-hand side of the screen) click on a channel to check the channel’s
configuration and to re-configure the channel, if desired. The Display Configuration Setup Window
will appear similar to that in the following figure.

Note:

Changing the display configuration does not change the existing channel configuration setup. It
only changes how the chart groups, charts, and channels will be displayed.

The following figure shows two “radio buttons” on the screen. These buttons allow you to select themethod of adjusting the display mode. From this screen you need to choose Units Full Scale orUnits/Div.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-35

Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1
Remember, you can enable additional channels from the Channel configuration window. Enabling
additional channels allows you to acquire more data; however, it will not change your chart display on
Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels, which
you do not monitor.

Chart Setup Wizard

Introduction
Chart Setup Wizard is a feature used by many programs, including Personal DaqView, and PostView. The
feature allows you to set up your initial chart display configuration using an automated method, or
manually create a new display configuration. The following points are important in regard to the Chart
Setup Wizard.
• You can edit the chart display by accessing the Display Configuration Setup dialog box from theChart pull-down menu or by clicking of the Chart Setup button in the Chart Display Window
toolbar. This method does not use the Chart Setup Wizard and does not reset your chart display
configuration setup.
• Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will reset your chart Display Configuration Setup.
• Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will not reset your Channel configuration.
The Chart Setup Wizard window will appear when you attempt to run Personal DaqView charts for thevery first time, as well as when a configuration file does not exist and you attempt to run charts. When aconfiguration file already exists, you can easily access the Chart Setup Wizard by selecting Wizard in theChart pull-down menu, or by clicking on the Chart Setup Wizard button (located in the Chart Display
Window’s toolbar). It is important to realize that running the Chart Setup Wizard will result in a reset ofyour display setup; it will not, however, change your channel configuration (with the exception of new
display channels now enabled).
The chart setup determines how your Personal DaqView Chart Display Window will appear in regard to
the following:
•
•
•
4-36

Personal DaqView

number of chart groups available for viewing
number of charts shown for each selected groupthe number of overlapping channels in each chart (not to exceed 4)989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualYou can choose to manually create a configuration, or have one created automatically. The automatic
setup method offers three choices: Simple, Moderate, and Advanced.
Note:

You can use Chart Setup Wizard to quickly set up a large number of charts. You can then finetune the layout manually via the Manual Chart Setup feature.

A Manual Chart Setup, Create Charts button allows you to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter amanual mode. This option makes use of Personal DaqView’s Display Configuration feature (discussion on
manually creating a chart display begins on page 4-33). Manual Chart Setup allows you to vary the numberof assigned channels per chart, as well as vary the number of charts per group.
Note:

The standard version of Personal DaqView has a Chart Setup Wizard that, in regard to
Automatic Chart Creation, is restricted to the Simple mode.

Chart Setup Wizard, Simple Mode
Setup
Type
SimpleModerate
Advanced

Chart Setup Wizard, Automatic Setup Options
Group Setup
Chart Setup
Channel Setup(for Chart Groups)
1 group only
Up to 16 charts
1 channel per chart
1 group only
Up to 16 charts
Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart
Up to 64 groups
Up to 16 charts per group
Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart

Note: The Manual Chart Setup, Create Charts button (above figure) allows you to exit theChart Setup Wizard and manually create your chart display without use of the automaticfunctions available in Chart Setup Wizard.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-37

Automatic Display Setup using the Chart Setup Wizard
The previous figure shows the Simple mode dialog box for Automatic Chart Creation. The following
figures show the Moderate and Advanced mode dialog boxes. These two modes do not apply to thestandard version of Personal DaqView.

Dialog Boxes for Moderate and Advanced Modes of Automatic Chart Creation
It is a simple task to create chart display configurations using the automatic method. The following steps
apply to this feature of Chart Setup Wizard.
1.

Select Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu of Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window.
The Wizard setup window appears.

2.

Select the desired mode tab (Simple, Moderate, or Advanced).

3.

Use the pull-down arrows (W), or use the cursor and type in a new value to make selections forthe number of groups, charts, and channels as applicable.

4.

If you desire to start with a channel other than the default channel (first available channel), use thepull-down arrow and select the desired starting channel number.

5.

When your setup is complete, click on the Automatic Chart Creation, Create Charts button. A
percentage of completion bar will appear, followed by the Channel Setup box.

6.

Make appropriate configuration changes, if any are desired, including enabling additional
channels; then click on the OK button. After clicking OK, the Chart Display Window appears andyou can begin running charts. Note that the Channel Setup section of this chapter contains related
information.

The channels in the setup you create will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on
Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window. The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will
be visible when the applicable Group is selected. Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at atime.
As mentioned earlier, you can enable additional channels from the Channel configuration window.
Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data to disk; however, it will not change yourdisplay on Personal DaqView’s Chart Display Window. In other words, you can acquire data fromchannels, which you do not monitor.

Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup
You can bypass Chart Setup Wizard by clicking on the Manual Chart Setup, Create Charts button in Chart
Setup Wizard’s Chart Display Window. After selecting this option you will be using the Display
Configuration Setup dialog boxes to create a display from scratch, i.e., using a “clean slate” approach.
This is method is detailed with an example, in the section Manually Creating a Display, beginning on page
4-33.

4-38

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Using Personal DaqView with Microsoft ExcelTM
OverView …… 39
First Time Use …… 40
Configuration Reference …… 42

Auto-Load Function ……44
Disabling Auto-Load …… 44
Enabling Auto-Load …… 44

Performance of Personal DaqViewXL ……45

Toolbar Buttons …… 42
Tools Pull-Down Menu ……43
Channel Configuration Window …… 44

Configuring an Acquisition ……45
Real-Time Charting ……46
Data Header ……47

Hints and Tips …… 48

When using Personal Daq modules to acquire data, computer energy save modes can cause false datareadings. Prior to using Personal Daq modules, ensure your computer’s energy save mode is disabled.
If needed, consult your computer’s user manual to disable energy save (power suspension) modes.

Overview

Personal DaqView includes a software component add-in that installs into Microsoft Excel™ and provides
complete setup and data acquisition within Excel under Windows2000 and XP. Acquired data is immediately
placed in an active spreadsheet, analyzed and graphically displayed.
After Personal DaqView has been installed, you can configure your data acquisition system easily by accessing
the desired window from the program’s toolbar, i.e., with use of the Configure Devices, Configure Channels,or Configure Acquisition buttons. Each column in the channel-configuration window corresponds to a specificparameter in the data acquisition system. Note that the channels can be configured individually.
In regard to creating data reports, you can embed Excel “spreadsheet objects” directly into a word processing
program, add text, and print the end result. To revise the report’s text, just edit the document as needed. To
update the spreadsheet, double-click on the embedded “spreadsheet object” to access Personal DaqView; thencreate and embed a new “spreadsheet object.”
Personal DaqView supports all models of the Personal Daq family, including expansion modules and provides
the engineering unit output required for each configured channel on an individual basis. For example, data for
a voltage channel can be returned in volts, while data from a thermocouple is being returned in degrees.
You can use Personal DaqView’s “scale and offset” feature to automatically convert channel data to custom
units and then have the scale and offset applied to the data prior to its appearing in the spreadsheet. The scaleand offset feature is especially handy for transducers such as strain gages because it converts the return voltage
value to units such as pounds or units of pressure.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-39

First Time Use
Perform the following steps to load Personal DaqView into Excel:
1.

Start Excel (refer to Microsoft documentation as needed).

2.

Select the “Tools” menu and click on “Add-Ins.”
This will open the “Add-Ins” dialog box.

3.

Click the “Browse” button and locate the file
pDaqView.xla. This file is located in the install

directory specified by the setup program. Click OK.

4.

Browse Option Dialog Box
Select Personal DaqViewXL from the “Add-Ins Available” list. Make sure there is a check next to
Personal DaqViewXL, and then click OK.

Add-Ins Dialog Box with Personal DaqViewXL Selected
5.

4-40

Excel loads the “add-in,” creating a Personal DaqViewXL item in the Tools pull-down menu and a toolbar.

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s Manual(1) Configure Devices(2) Configure Channels(3) Configure Acquisition(4) Go!
(5) Manual Trigger(6) Chart Display(7) Bar Graph Meters(8) Analog Meters(9) Digital Meters(10) Use Data Destination(11) Set Data Destination Cell
(12) Use Data Header

Personal DaqViewXL Toolbar Options
Personal DaqViewXL Menu Options
After Personal DaqView is installed in this manner, it will automatically load whenever you run Excel.
6. If you want to start Personal DaqView when Personal DaqViewXL is used for the first time:a) Click the Personal DaqViewXL selection (located in Excel’s Tools pull-down menu).
b) Choose “Options…” (the Options Dialog Box appears).
c) Select “Start the first time I use Personal DaqViewXL.”d) Click “OK.”7.

Personal DaqViewXL Start-up Options Dialog Box
If you want to start Personal DaqView as soon as Excel is opened:a) Click the Personal DaqViewXL selection (located in Excel’s Tools pull-down menu).
b) Choose “Options…” (the Options Dialog Box appears).
c) Select “Start as soon as I open Excel.”d) Click “OK.”

Note:

After you have launched Excel and Personal DaqViewXL has been activated, the following dialog
box appears if Personal DaqView is not running. If this is the case, click “Yes” to start
Personal DaqViewXL.

Personal DaqView Startup Confirmation

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-41

The following figure shows a partial screen capture of a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. In the figure, thePersonal DaqViewXL item has been selected from the Tools pull-down menu. Personal DaqViewXL’s toolbar can also beseen in the figure.

Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet showing Personal DaqViewXL Menu Options

Configuration Reference
The following information is intended to serve as a quick reference regarding channel configuration. You should refer to theuser’s manual for more detailed information regarding Personal DaqView, as needed.

Toolbar Buttons
Note: The functions that can be obtained through the toolbar can also be obtained through the pull-down menus.

Personal DaqViewXL Toolbar

4-42

ButtonFunction1

Configure Devices

Opens the Select Active Devices window.

2

Configure Channels

Opens the Channel Configuration Spreadsheet. If the window is already open, pressing this button gives
the window focus.

3

Configure Acquisition

Opens the Configure Acquisition Dialog. Various acquisition parameters can be set from this dialog.

4

Go!

Starts an acquisition and inserts the data into the current spreadsheet destination cell. Pressing the
button again stops the acquisition.

5

Manual Trigger

Manually triggers the acquisition when applicable.

6

Chart Display

7

Bar Graph Meters Display

Opens the Chart Display, where data is displayed in graphical in a chart format. If Chart Display isalready open, pressing this button gives the window focus.
Opens the Bar Graph Meters, where data is displayed in a bar graph format. If Bar Graph Meters isalready open, pressing this button gives the window focus.

8

Analog Meters Display

9

Digital Meters Display

10

Use Data Destination

Opens the Analog Meters Display, where data is displayed in an analog meter format. If Analog Meters
Display is already open, pressing this button gives the window focus.
Opens the Digital Meters Display, where data is displayed in a digital meter format. If Digital Meters isalready open, pressing this button gives the window focus.
Turns the Use Data Destination feature on or off.

11

Set Data Destination Cell

Sets the data destination cell to the “active” cell in the current workbook.

12

Use Data Header

Turns the Use Data Header feature on or off.

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualTools Pull-Down Menu
When the Personal DaqViewXL add-in is loaded, a Personal DaqViewXL menu is added to Excel’s Tools pull-down menu.
You can use the menu items to perform all actions that are available from Personal DaqViewXL’s toolbar. Note that some ofthe pull-down items have no toolbar equivalent.
Menu Item

Function1

New Configuration

Provides a means of creating a new configuration from default settings.

2

Open Configuration…

3

Save Configuration

4
5
6

Save Configuration As…
Configure Devices…
Configure Channels

Provides a means of opening an existing configuration file. This feature may be used to open
configuration files created by the Personal DaqView application.
Saves the configuration file under its existing filename. Note that you can open Personal DaqViewXL
files from the Personal DaqView application.
Copies the current file for saving under a different filename.
Opens the Select Active Devices window.
Opens the Channel Configuration Spreadsheet. If the window is already open, pressing this button
gives the window focus.

7

Configure Acquisition…

Opens the Configure Acquisition Dialog. Various acquisition parameters can be set from this dialog.

8

Go!

Starts an acquisition and inserts the data into the current spreadsheet destination cell. Selecting theitem again stops the acquisition.

9

Manual Trigger

Manually triggers the acquisition when applicable.

10

Update Digital Outputs

11

Save Power-up Settings

12

Chart Display

13

Bar Graph Meters Display

Updates the digital output channels. This item is only enabled when the digital output channels are not
updated and the acquisition state is idle.
Saves the current power-up settings for all devices in the configuration. The power-up settings takeeffect when the device is first plugged into an active USB port.
Opens the Chart Display, where data is displayed in graphical in a chart format. If Chart Display isalready open, selecting this item gives the window focus.
Opens the Bar Graph Meters, where data is displayed in a bar graph format. If Bar Graph Meters isalready open, selecting this item gives the window focus.

14

Analog Meters Display

15

Digital Meters Display

16

Use Data Destination

Opens the Analog Meters Display, where data is displayed in an analog meter format. If Analog Meters
Display is already open, selecting this item gives the window focus.
Opens the Digital Meters Display, where data is displayed in a digital meter format. If Digital Meters isalready open, selecting this item gives the window focus.
Turns the Use Data Destination feature on or off.

17

Set Data Destination Cell

Sets the data destination cell to the “active” cell in the current workbook.

18
19
20

Use Data Header
Options…
Preferences…

Turns the Use Data Header feature on or off.
Opens Personal DaqViewXL’s Options Dialog.
Opens Personal DaqViewXL’s Preferences Dialog. From this dialog box you can use the General and
Measurement Units dialog boxes as described below.
General − Allows you to select “untitled” or “pDaq” configurations for the default
filename used by Personal Daq. Note that Personal DaqView automaticallyloads the last saved configuration file. The lower portion of the General screen
pertains to configuration file settings.

Measurement Units − Allows you to set the desired default units for the
Channel Configuration Window’s spreadsheet. Note that scale and offset
automatically reset to a pre-designated default according to the unit selected.
Changing the measurement unit defaults does not immediately affect theChannel Configuration Window’s spreadsheet columns. For example: If you
set your voltage default to µV, but the channels are set with V units, they willretain the V units. However, changing these channels to temperature, thenback to voltage would result in the default units (µV) and the associated scale &
offset. The new default units are also applied to all channels when a new
configuration file is created.

Preferences Screen Captures (Condensed Images)
21

About…

22

Help…

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Provides version information for the active Personal DaqViewXL add-in and the
Personal DaqView application.
Launches the Personal DaqViewXL section of the Personal DaqView help file.

989592

Personal DaqView

4-43

Channel Configuration Window
You can bring up the Channel Configuration Window by using the Configure Channel Settings button (9) on the Main
Control Window toolbar, or by selecting Configure Channels from the Personal DaqViewXL pull-down menu.
The Channel Configuration Window contains a Control pull-down menu and a 2-button toolbar. The window displays any
one of three tabbed spreadsheets for selecting the type of channel to be configured. The tabs are labeled Analog Input,
Frequency/Pulse Input, and Digital Input/Output.

Channel Configuration Window, Selected for Analog Input Spreadsheet
Toolbar
The Channel Configuration Window consists of two buttons (items 16 and 17) as identified by the previous figure and thefollowing table.
Button16

Enable Readings Column

17

Disable Readings Column

Function
Activates the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect the recording ofdata to the destination spreadsheet.
Stops the Channel Configuration Window’s reading column. Does not affect the recording of data
to the destination spreadsheet.

Channel Configuration Window Pull-down Menu
The channel configuration window contains one pull-down menu labeled, Control. This menu provides a means of enablingand disabling the readings column, as do toolbar items (16 and 17).

Auto-Load Function
Excel’s “Add-Ins” dialog box has a check-box for enabling (9) or disabling an automatic loading of Personal DaqViewXL
each time you run Excel. To enable or disable the auto-load feature, refer to the following two paragraphs as needed.

Disabling Auto-Load
If you want to avoid an automatic loading of Personal DaqViewXL each time you run Excel, perform the following steps:
1. Start Excel.
2. Select the “Tools” menu and click on “Add-Ins.” The “Add-Ins” dialog box opens.
3. Locate the Personal DaqViewXL line in the “Add-Ins Available” list box and click on it.
This should remove the checkmark next to the item.
4. Click “OK.”Personal DaqViewXL will no longer auto-load with Excel. See the following paragraph for simple steps on enabling the
Personal DaqViewXL auto-load feature.

Enabling Auto-Load
If you want Personal DaqViewXL to automatically load each time you run Excel, perform the following steps:
1. Start Excel.
2. Select the “Tools” menu and click on “Add-Ins.” The “Add-Ins” dialog box opens.
3. Locate the Personal DaqViewXL line in the “Add-Ins Available” list box and click on it.
This should insert a checkmark (9) next to the item.
4. Click “OK.”Personal DaqViewXL will now auto-load with Excel. See the previous paragraph for simple steps on disabling
the Personal DaqViewXL auto-load feature.

4-44

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualPerformance of Personal DaqView with Excel
An understanding of these basics will let you explore each of Personal DaqViewXL’s many features.
Note: The Hints and Tips section contains suggestions for improving your productivity with Personal DaqView andMicrosoft Excel. If you are not proficient with Excel, please refer to your Excel documentation as needed.
The more you know about Excel, the better.

Personal DaqViewXL Spreadsheet with Toolbar and Displays

Personal DaqViewXL Toolbar(1) Configure Devices(2) Configure Channels(3) Configure Acquisition(4) Go!
(5) Manual Trigger(6) Chart Display(7) Bar Graph Meters(8) Analog Meters(9) Digital Meters(10) Use Data Destination(11) Set Data Destination Cell
(12) Use Data Header

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-45

Configuring an Acquisition
To set up your configuration, once Personal DaqViewXL has been installed; complete the following steps:
1. Enter Excel.

Personal DaqView Channel Configuration Screen within Excel
2.

Configure acquisition settings using the Configure Devices, Configure Channels, andConfigure Acquisition toolbar buttons or tool pull-down menu selections.

These steps launch Personal DaqView’s configuration screens. Note that the Personal DaqView configuration information,found in the Personal Daq User’s Manual, still applies to Personal DaqViewXL. Also see the section in this user’s guide,
Configuration Reference, beginning on page 4-42.

Real-Time Charting
Personal DaqViewXL provides a real-time strip-chart window (as in Personal DaqView) for graphical presentation of data.
You can select up to 16 channels of data, with one channel assigned to each graph. The strip-chart representation iscontinuous while data is being collected. All 16 charts are synchronized and have an adjustable scrolling speed that can be
set independent of the sampling rate. Selecting the Charts icon in the Personal DaqViewXL toolbar will activate thefollowing window. The chart selection must be made prior to initiating an acquisition (selecting the Go! icon).

4-46

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualPersonal DaqViewXL Real-Time Charting

Data Header
The optional data header supplies the global acquisition parameters and the configuration of each channel and places thisinformation directly in the spreadsheet along with acquired data. Examples of frequently used header information include:
channel gain, thermocouple type, units, and channel label. To activate Data Headers select the Use Data Headers icon in the
Personal DaqViewXL toolbar.

Personal DaqViewXL Data Header

Personal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-47

Hints and Tips•

If Personal DaqView is running as a stand-alone application when you start to use Personal DaqViewXL,
Personal DaqView will switch to a special “server mode.” This “server mode” supports transactions with“client” applications such as Excel. Note that you must close Excel prior to using Personal DaqView again
as a stand-alone application.

•

When you acquire data into a worksheet, some of the data may be displayed as a string of pound characters(######). Excel will use these characters when a column is not wide enough to display all the digits of agiven number. Sufficient widening of the column will eliminate the symbols. You can widen columns
using the “Format, Column, Auto Fit Selection” menu command. Clicking on this menu-item
automatically adjusts column widths to accommodate the data.

•

Personal DaqViewXL does not have to be used as an Excel “Add-In;” it can also be loaded as a workbook.
To do so, open pDaqView.xla using the File Open dialog box. The Personal DaqViewXL toolbar andmenu items will be added to Excel.

•

When loading the Personal DaqViewXL add-in manually, Excel does not automatically create a blankworkbook. To create a workbook, access the File, New menu item (after Excel loads with Personal
DaqViewXL).
Note:

•

When you load Personal DaqViewXL as a workbook, it will not automatically load the next time
you run Excel. However, it will appear in the recently used list at the bottom of the File menu,
making it easy to load the next time you run Excel.
You can arm an acquisition from an Excel macro as shown in the following VBA code example:
Sub GoMacro()
Dim cbpMenu As CommandBarPopup
Dim cbButton As CommandBarButton'Get the Personal DaqViewXL menu object.
Set cbpMenu = CommandBars("Tools").Controls("Personal DaqViewXL")'Get the "Go!" command button object.
Set cbButton = cbpMenu.Controls(8)'Execute the button's command if the button is enabled.
If cbButton.Enabled Then cbButton.Execute
End Sub

This is equivalent to clicking "Go!" on the Personal DaqViewXL menu or toolbar. Any of the other commands on the
Personal DaqViewXL menu may be executed in a similar manner.
•

4-48

If Personal DaqView cannot connect to your hardware on start-up, it will automatically switch to the
Simulated Instrument mode when loaded from Personal DaqViewXL.

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualPersonal Daq User’s Manual

989592

Personal DaqView

4-49

4-50

Personal DaqView

989592

Personal Daq User’s ManualSignal Management

5

Overview ……5-1
Channel Control and Expansion ……5-3Signal Acquisition ……5-4
Measurement Duration, Sample Rate, andResolution ……5-4
Under Sampling and Aliasing …… 5-4
Triggering ……5-5
Input Isolation ……5-6

System Noise ……5-7
Averaging ……5-7
Analog Filtering ……5-8
Input and Source Impedance ……5-8
Crosstalk ……5-8Signal Modes ……5-6

Overview
This chapter pertains to signal management, the use of different types of signals, and how to reduce
common noise problems. The final portion of the chapter contains basic troubleshooting tips.
This table defines data acquisition terms, as used in this manual.
Acquisition
Aliasing

AnalogAnalog-to-Digital
Converter (ADC)API

BufferBuffer Amplifier

ChannelCommon mode
voltage

Crosstalk
DigitalDigital-to-Analog
Converter (DAC)

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Data Acquisition Terms and Meanings
A collection of scans acquired at a specified rate.
A type of error that results from having a scan rate set too low for a given variable
input signal. Depending of the amount of aliasing, a sign wave may appear
jagged, flat, or as a sign wave at a different frequency.
A signal of varying voltage or current that communicates data. Typical analog
signals have the form of sine waves.
A circuit or device that converts analog values into digital values, such as binary bits,
for use in digital computer processing.
Application Program Interface. The interface program within the Personal Daq
system’s driver that includes function calls specific to Personal Daq hardware andcan be used with user-written programs (several languages supported).
Buffer refers to a circuit or device that allows a signal to pass through it, whileproviding isolation, or another function, without altering the signal. Buffer usuallyrefers one of the following:(a) A device or circuit, which allows for the temporary storage of data during datatransfers. Such storage is often necessary to compensate for differences indata flow rates. A FIFO (First In - First Out) buffer is one in which the data thatis stored first, is also the first data to leave the buffer.
(b) A follower stage, which is used to drive a certain number of gates without
overloading the proceeding, stage.
(c) An amplifier which accepts high source impedance input and results in low
source impedance output (effectively, an impedance buffer).
(d) Buffer Amplifier (see Buffer Amplifier).
An amplifier used primarily to match two different impedance points, and isolate one
stage from a succeeding stage in order to prevent an undesirable interaction
between the two stages. (Also see Buffer).
In reference to Personal Daq, channel simply refers to a single input, or output entity.
In a broader sense, an input channel is a signal path between the transducer at the
point of measurement and the data acquisition system. A channel can go throughvarious stages (buffers, multiplexers, or signal conditioning amplifiers and filters).
Input channels are periodically sampled for readings.
An output channel from a device can be digital or analog. Outputs can vary in a
programmed way in response to an input channel signal.
Common mode voltage refers to a voltage magnitude (referenced to a common
point) that is shared by 2 or more signals. Example: Signal 1 is +5VDC
referenced to common. Signal 2 is +6VDC referenced to common. The common
mode voltage for the two signals is ((5 + 6) ÷2), or +5.5 VDC
Common mode pertains to signals that are identical in amplitude and duration; andcan be used in reference to signal components.
An undesired transfer of signals between systems or system components. Crosstalkcauses signal interference, more commonly referred to as noise.
A digital signal is one of discrete value, in contrast to a varying signal. Digital data isrepresented by combinations of binary digits (0s and 1s).
A circuit or device that converts digital values (binary bits), into analog signals.

928196Signal Management

5-1

Data Acquisition Terms and Meanings
Differential mode
voltage

ESD

Excitation

Gain
Isolation

Linearization

Multiplexer (MUX)
Sample (reading)
Scan
Single-ended mode
TriggerTTL

5-2

Signal Management

Differential mode voltage refers to a voltage difference between two signals
referenced to a common point. Example: Signal 1 is +5VDC referenced tocommon. Signal 2 is +6VDC referenced to common. If the +5VDC is used as thereference, then the differential voltage is (6 - 5), or +1VDC. If the +6VDC is usedas the reference, then the differential voltage is (5 - 6), or –1VDC. ).
The differential mode measures a voltage between 2 signal lines for a single
channel. (Also see single-ended mode).
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the transfer of an electrostatic charge between
bodies having different electrostatic potentials. This transfer occurs during directcontact of the bodies, or when induced by an electrostatic field. ESD energy candamage an integrated circuit (IC); so safe handling is required.
Some transducers [e.g. strain gages, thermistors, and resistance temperaturedetectors (RTDs)] require a known voltage or current. Typically, the variation ofthis signal through the transducer corresponds to the condition measured.
The degree to which an input signal is amplified (or attenuated) to allow greater
accuracy and resolution. Gain can be expressed as ×n or ±dB.
The arrangement or operation of a circuit so that signals from another circuit ordevice do not affect the isolated circuit.
In reference to Personal Daq, isolation usually refers to a separation of the direct link
between the signal source and the analog-to-digital converter (ADC), as well as
the 500V isolation form the PC. Isolation is necessary when measuring highcommon-mode voltage.
Some transducers produce a voltage in linear proportion to the condition measured.
Other transducers (e.g., thermocouples) have a nonlinear response. To convert
nonlinear signals into accurate readings requires software to calibrate several
points in the range used and then interpolate values between these points.
A device that collects signals from several input channels and outputs them on asingle channel.
The value of a signal on a channel at an instant in time. When triggered, the ADC
reads the channel and converts the sampled value into a designated bit value.
The channels that are selected for sampling.
The single-ended mode measures a voltage between a signal line and a common
reference that may be shared with other channels. (Also see differential mode).
An event to start a scan or mark an instant during an acquisition. The event can be
defined in various ways; e.g., a TTL signal, a specified voltage level in a monitored
channel, a button manually or mechanically engaged, a software command, etc.
Some applications may use pre- and post-triggers to gather data around an instantor based on signal counts.
Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) is a circuit in which a multiple-emitter transistor has
replaced the multiple diode cluster (of the diode-transistor logic circuit); typicallyused to communicate logic signals at 5 V.

878695

Personal Daq User’s ManualChannel Control and Expansion
In a Personal Daq system, the quantities and types of Personal Daqs used, as well as the types andquantities of PDQ expansion cards used, determines the system’s channel capacity. Up to 100 Personal
Daqs can be used with one host PC.
Total channel capacity of a Personal Daq system can be calculated from the following tables:

Channel Capacities for Various Personal Daq Setups
Personal Daq/54
Personal Daq/54---- No Expansion ---Personal Daq/55 Systems

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

5 DE, or 10 SE

5 DE---- N/A -------- N/A ----

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

Personal Daq/55

5 DE, or 10 SE

5 DE

8

2

Personal Daq/55 with PDQ1

15 DE, or 30 SE

15 DE

24

2

Personal Daq/55 with PDQ225 DE, or 50 SE

25 DE

8

2

Volts Inputs

TC Inputs

Digital I/O

Freq/Pulse Inputs

Personal Daq/56

Personal Daq/56 Systems

10 DE, or 20 SE

10 DE

16

4

Personal Daq/56 with PDQ1

20 DE, or 40 SE

20 DE

32

4

Personal Daq/56 with PDQ230 DE, or 60 SE

30 DE

16

4

DE = Differential Mode, SE = Single-Ended Mode

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878695Signal Management

5-3

Signal Acquisition
Measurement Duration, Sample Rate, and Resolution
Measurement Duration (per channel) ⎯ the amount of time used for sampling a channel’s input signal.
For Personal Daq, the measurement durations range from very slow (610 milliseconds/sample) to very fast
(12.5 milliseconds/sample).
Sample rate – Samples per second. The sample rate is the number of samples that take place per second.
With a slow measurement duration of 610 milliseconds, there will only be 1.6 samples per second. With avery fast measurement duration of 12.5 milliseconds, there will be 80 samples per second.
Resolution (Bits RMS) – The number of reliable data bits that exist for a signal’s measurement. The
greater the resolution, the more detailed the reading, for example, with increased resolution a reading of
5.12 V could become 5.11896 V. Personal Daq actually provides for 24 bits of data information; however,
the accuracy of the least significant bits becomes less as the measurement duration speeds up. At ameasurement duration of 610 milliseconds, the last two bits are considered unreliable, resulting in a
resolution of 22 bits. At a very fast measurement duration (12.5 milliseconds), the nine most leastsignificant bits are unreliable, resulting in 15 bit accuracy.
Speed vs. Resolution1
Speed Designation

Very Slow, 50 / 60 Hz rejection
Slow, 50 Hz rejection
Slow, 60 Hz rejection
Medium, 50 Hz rejection
Medium, 60 Hz rejection
MediumFast
Very Fast
Notes:

2

Measurement
Duration

Maximum
2
Sample Rate

Resolution(Bits RMS)

(per channel)(Samples/sec)(-4 V to +4 V range)

610 ms
370 ms
310 ms
130 ms
110 ms
40 ms
20 ms
12.5ms

1.6 / sec
2.7 / sec
3.2 / sec
7.7 / sec
9.2 / sec
25 / sec
48 / sec
80 / sec

22
22
22
21
21
19
17
15

1.

Each channel can have independent measurement duration and resolution.

2.

The sample rates shown were obtained with a 10-channel scan and with
continuous self-calibration disabled.

3.

Duration does not include the use of CJC measurements.

When you select the measurement duration you also determine the sample rate and resolution for theapplicable channel. For Personal Daq’s analog input applications, sample rates range from 1.6 samples/sec
up to 80 samples/sec and corresponding resolution ranges from 22 to 15 bits.

Under Sampling and Aliasing
When you select the measurement duration you also determine the sample rate and resolution for theapplicable channel. As shown in the previous table, sample rates range from 1.6 samples/sec up to
80 samples/sec and corresponding resolution ranges from 22 to 15 bit (for Personal Daq’s analog input
applications).
When measuring highly variable input signals (as opposed to relatively steady input signals), the variable
signals will require more samples/sec to obtain a realistic signal representation. When too few samples aretaken, the term under sampling is often used. Under sampling tends to lower the signal’s graphed
amplitude. This is also known as aliasing. In such cases, the inadequate number of samples results in a“flattening” of the signal. Gross under sampling can even result in a relatively flat line, even though theactual signal is a waveform.
For best results the sample rate (scan rate) should be at least 10 times the measurement frequency. If
possible it is recommended that you set the scan rate to 20 times the frequency of the input signal.

5-4

Signal Management

878695

Personal Daq User’s ManualNote:

Frequency channels will read frequency regardless of the scan rate. Personal Daq circuitry reads apulse count and timer count during each scan.

The following table provides general advice regarding the selection of measurement duration. The
concepts are further illustrated by the figure, Examples of Under Sampling.
Analog Input Signal
Variability

Measurement
Duration

SampleRate

Resolution

Steady, or gradualchange

Long

low

high

Highly variable(unsteady)

Short

high

low

Examples of Under Sampling
The above figure depicts three signals from the same temperature fluctuations. Under Sampling (aliasing)is evident in two of the signals. Elaboration follows:Signal 1 – This signal, based on 1 sample per division, is represented by a heavy solid line andsample-points designated by polygon symbols. The signal represented is a fairly accurate portrayal of theactual temperature fluctuations.
Signal 2 – This signal, based on 1 sample every 3 divisions, is represented by a heavy dotted line andsample-points designated by squares. Under sampling has resulted in a distortion, in effect, a lower
amplitude than that exhibited by the first signal, even though each measured point is accurate.
Signal 3 – This signal, based on 1 sample every 4 divisions, is represented by a dotted/dashed line andsample-points designated by plus signs (+). Fewer samples (a greater degree of under sampling) has
resulted in a further distortion and lowering of signal amplitude.
From these examples it should be realized that more samples will result in a more accurate representationof the actual signal, and that under sampling will tend to lower the amplitude of the signal, exhibiting a
trend toward a “flat line” state.
As stated earlier, the more variability a signal has, the more samples that are needed to accurately portrayit.

Triggering
Triggering controls an acquisition cycle. Once the system is armed, a trigger is required to collect the data.
Typically, three data collection parameters are specified: the pre-trigger count, the post-trigger scan count,and the trigger source. The user must determine the triggering requirement based on the nature of themeasurement and the amount of data needed to satisfy the system’s purpose.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878695Signal Management

5-5

•

The pre-trigger scan count specifies the number of scans that are to be collected before the trigger
point. If the pre-trigger scan count is greater than zero, the system will continuously collect data
until the trigger is satisfied. If no pre-trigger scans are required, the system sits idle until the trigger;then, it collects the post-trigger scans before it disarms.

•

The post-trigger scan count specifies the number of scans to be collected after the trigger point.
After the trigger, the post-trigger scans will be collected as programmed and then the system will
disarm itself.

•

The trigger source can be a software command, an external TTL input, etc. An analog input
channel on reaching a specified voltage level can be used to trigger the system.

Input Isolation
Three benefits of input isolation are circuit protection, noise reduction, and the rejection of high common
mode voltage.
•

Circuit protection. Input isolation separates the signal source from circuits that may be damaged by
the signal. (Voltages higher than about 10 V can distort data or damage chips used in dataacquisition.) High-voltage signals or signals with high-voltage spikes should therefore be isolated.
The protection can also work the other way—to safeguard a sensitive signal conditioner from afailing device elsewhere in the system.

•

Noise reduction. Isolation eliminates ground loops for high-gain systems and multi-unit systems
that are grounded together. The chassis for each device can rest at a ground potential slightly
different from the other devices. These irrelevant currents and the spikes they may have picked up
by induction can thus be kept out of the measurement circuit.

•

Rejection of high common mode voltage. There is a limit to the amount of voltage a differential
amplifier can have applied between ground and the amplifier inputs. Fortunately, the differential
amplifier rejects high common mode voltage signals. High common mode voltage and noise spikes
are rejected (canceled out) in in-phase signals identical in amplitude and frequency that are present
in both the high and low inputs at the same time.

Signal Modes
Personal Daq units operate in one of two modes, (1) single-ended mode, or (2) differential mode. These
terms (single-ended mode and differential mode) apply to their use in this manual. In other sources theseterms may be used in a different manner.
Choosing between differential and single-ended inputs is made by software command. The following text
briefly describes the two signal modes.
Single-ended mode refers to a mode, or circuit set-up, in which a voltage is measured between 1 signal line
and common ground voltage (Vcm). The measured voltage may be shared with other channels. The
advantage of a single-ended non-differential mode [over differential mode] is that it provides for a higher
channel count, for example: 20 channels instead of 10.
In Personal Daq applications, thermocouples should not be connected single-ended. Doingso can result in noise and false readings. This is especially true when acquiring other highamplitude signals in conjunction with thermocouple signals that are connected single-ended.
Differential mode refers to a mode, or circuit set-up, in which a voltage is measured between 2 signallines. The measured differential voltage is used for a single channel. An advantage of using differential
inputs is that they reduce signal errors and the induction of noise resulting from ground current. The
following illustration is an example of how noise is reduced, or canceled-out, when using the differential
mode.

5-6

Signal Management

878695

Personal Daq User’s ManualIn the schematic, voltage signal S2 is subtracted from signal S1,
resulting in the output signal shown. The noise spikes (having
the same polarity, phase, and magnitude in each input signal)
cancel each other out. This results in a clean differential signal(S1 - S2).
In the schematic, signals S1 and S2 are shown in-phase; however,even if these signals were out of phase, the noise in each(indicated by jagged lines) would still have the same magnitude, phase, and polarity. For that reason, theywould still cancel out.
Floating-differential measurements are made when low-level signals
must be measured in the presence of high levels of common-mode noise(e.g., a non-grounded thermocouple). When the signal source has nodirect connection to the system analog common, one must be provided. In
Personal Daq the connection to analog common is provided in thecircuitry with both the channel high and channel low connected to analog
common. Both of these connections to common are made through 10 MΩ
resistors. No additional connections of channel high and low to common
should be made.
Example of Floating Differential Circuit
Differential signal hookups do not provide isolation or any kind of circuit protection.

Resolution: An analog-to-digital converter (ADC) converts an analog voltage to a digital number. The
digital number represents the input voltage in discrete steps with finite resolution. ADC resolution isdetermined by the number of bits that represent the digital number. An n-bit ADC has a resolution of 1
part in 2n. Thus, 12 and 16 bit resolutions are as follows:•

12-bit resolution: 1 part in 4096 (212), corresponding to 2.44 mV in a 10 V range.

•

16-bit resolution: 1 part in 65,536 (216), corresponding to 0.153 mV in a 10 V range.

System Noise
Laboratory and industrial environments often have multiple sources of electrical noise. An AC power line
is a source of 50/60 Hz noise. Heavy equipment (air conditioners, elevators, pumps, etc.) can be a sourceof noise, particularly when turned on and off. Local radio stations are a source of high-frequency noise,and computers and other electronic equipment can create noise in a multitude of frequency ranges. Thus,an absolute noise-free environment for data acquisition is not realistic. Fortunately, noise-reduction
techniques such as averaging, filtering, differential voltage measurement, and shielding are available toreduce noise to an acceptable level.

Averaging
Certain acquisition programs apply averaging after several samples have been collected. Depending on thenature of the noise, averaging can reduce noise by the square root of the number of averaged samples.
Although averaging can be effective, it suffers from several drawbacks. Noise in measurements only
decreases as the square root of the number of measurements—reducing RMS noise significantly may
require many samples. Thus, averaging is suited to low-speed applications that can provide many samples.
Note: Only random noise is reduced or eliminated by averaging. Averaging does not reduce or eliminate
periodic signals.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878695Signal Management

5-7Analog Filtering
A filter is an analog circuit element that attenuates an incoming signal according to its frequency. A lowpass filter attenuates frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Conversely, a high-pass filter attenuatesfrequencies below the cutoff. As frequency increases beyond the cutoff point, the attenuation of a singlepole, low-pass filter increases slowly. Multi-pole filters provide greater attenuation beyond the cutoff
frequency but may introduce phase (time delay) problems that could affect some applications.

Input and Source Impedance
As illustrated in the figure to the right, the input impedance(Ri) of an analog-to-digital converter combines with thetransducer’s source impedance (Rs) forming a voltage
divider. This divider distorts the voltage being read at theanalog-to-digital converter. The actual voltage read isrepresented by the equation:
VADC = VT × Ri / (Rs + Ri)
The input impedance (Ri) of most ADCs is at least 1 MΩ; low source impedance (Rs) usually presents noproblem. Some transducers, such as piezoelectric types, have high source impedance, and should therefore
be used with a charge-sensitive amplifier of low output impedance. As described in the following
paragraphs, multiplexing can greatly reduce the effective input impedance of an analog-to-digitalconverter.

Crosstalk
Crosstalk is a type of noise related to source impedance and capacitance, in which signals from one
channel leak into an adjacent channel, resulting in interference or signal distortion. The impact of source
impedance and stray capacitance can be estimated by using the following equation.
T = RC
Where T is the time constant, R is the source impedance, and C is the stray capacitance.
High source (transducer) impedance can be a problem in multiplexed A/D systems. When using more than
1 channel, the channel input signals are multiplexed into the A/D. The multiplexer samples each signal andthen switches to the next input signal. A high-impedance input interacts with the multiplexer’s stray
capacitance and causes crosstalk and inaccuracies in the A/D sample.
A solution to high source impedance in relation to multiplexers involves the use of buffers. The term
buffer has several meanings; but in this case, buffer refers to an operational amplifier having high input
impedance but very low output impedance. Placing such a buffer on each channel (between the transducer
and the multiplexer) prevents the multiplexer’s stray capacitance from combining with the high input
impedance. This use of a buffer also stops transient signals from propagating backwards from themultiplexer to the transducer.

5-8

Signal Management

878695

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Calibration

6

Introduction ……6-1
Required Equipment ……6-2
Calibration Procedure ……6-2

Introduction
Although Personal Daq units are calibrated prior to shipment, they still require periodic calibration toensure that accuracy is maintained. The industry standard for this calibration is once per year.
UserCal provides prompts to assist you through Personal Daq’s calibration procedure. The Windowsbased program was developed with the intent of making the calibration task easy to perform.
Note: Calibration constants are calculated and stored in each Personal Daq unit’s serial EEPROM. Thispermits adding expansion modules to single Personal Daq units. It also allows you to swap
expansion modules from one Personal Daq unit to another.

CAUTIONUse approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,
when handling electronic components. Failure to do so could cause equipment damage
due to electrostatic discharge.

Calibration is to be performed by authorized personnel in a controlled, still air
environment at 23±2°C. Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty
equipment performance and necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab.

The VDC Calibrator used must meet the following criteria:
1) Range: 0 - 10 V
2) Resolution: 10 µV
3) Peak-to-peak noise: 600 µV
The digital voltmeter (or digital multimeter) used to verify calibration voltage accuracy
must meet the following criteria:1) Minimum Resolution: 6-1/2 digits
2) Minimum DC Accuracy: 0.005% full scale
Failure to comply with these requirements can result in faulty equipment performanceand necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab.
Never connect an expansion module to (or remove it from) a Personal Daq main unit while
the main unit is connected to a power source. Such action may result in EEPROM errors
and loss of calibration data.

Allow at least 1 hour warm-up time for the VDC Calibrator, Digital Multimeter, and each
Personal Daq unit (including expansion module) that is to be calibrated. If a cold cell
device is used, allow the cell to warm up in accordance with device operator’s manual.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Calibration

6-1

Required Equipment
You will need the following items to perform Personal Daq calibration. Ensure the equipment meets the
specifications listed in the cautions on the preceding page.
Equipment for
Voltage Portion of Calibration

Equipment for
Thermocouple Portion of Calibration*

VDC Calibrator

0°C Temperature Reference (Cold cell, or ice bath)

Digital Voltmeter

T-type Thermocouple

Copper Short

T-type T/C wire

2-Pin Connector Harness (made from DB25 Male
Connector, see figure on page 6-5)
Note that the harness is not required; however, its
use is recommended to avoid damaging the
Personal Daq expansion connector and to ensure
good pin contact.

*Thermocouple calibration not required if Personal
Daq system is not used for temperature
measurements.

Calibration Procedure
Computer energy save (suspension modes) can result in false calibration constants anderroneous data. Prior to the one-hour calibration warm up time, ensure yourcomputer’s energy save mode is disabled. If needed, consult your PC user’s manual todisable energy save.
Observe the above caution and those listed on page 6-1.
Note: UserCal provides screen prompts to guide you through the calibration procedure.
1.

Disconnect the USB cable from the Personal Daq main unit.

2.

If a power adapter is used in your application, disconnect the adapter cable from the unit.

3.

Remove all signal lines from the main unit terminal blocks.

4.

If an expansion module is used, remove all signal lines from the expansion module terminal blocks.

5.

If an expansion module is used in your application, but is not connected to the main unit, connect themodule to the main unit and secure with retaining clips.

6.

If you do not use your Personal Daq system for temperature measurements, proceed directly to step 7.
If you use your Personal Daq system for any temperature measurements, complete steps a) through d),then proceed with step 7.
a)

Place thermocouple in an ice bath or cold cell device at 0°C.

b) Connect red (-) thermocouple wire to channel 1L.
c)Connect blue (+) thermocouple wire to 1H.

d) Daisy-chain stripped T-type T/C wire to all analog channels as follows:•

red (-) wire to each analog Lo channel, except channel 2L.

•

blue (+) wire to each analog Hi channel, except channel 2H.

The following two figures illustrate these connections for a Personal Daq/55 with a PDQ1 expansion
module.

6-2

Calibration

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualIt is important to perform calibration in a controlled, still air environment at 23±2°C.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Calibration

6-3

7.

Make the following 3 voltage-related connections (see following figure).
• Copper short: From Personal Daq Analog In 2L (2 low) to Personal Daq common (COM).
• HI Lead: From Volts DC Calibrator HI to Personal Daq Analog In 2H (2 high)• LO Lead: From Volts DC Calibrator LO to Personal Daq Analog In 2L (2 low)

Note: Thermocouple wiring not shown for clarity.

8.

If used in your application, connect the power adapter to the Personal Daq.

9.

Connect the USB cable to the Personal Daq.

10. Allow the entire setup to warm up for at least one hour. If using a cold cell device, allow the cell towarm up in accordance with the device operator’s manual.
11. Start the UserCal program from a desktop shortcut, or from the Windows Start Menu.
12. If you do not use your Personal Daq system for temperature measurements, deselect the Thermocouple
Calibration option shown in the UserCal dialog box.
13. Using the keypad of your PC or laptop, enter a reference value between +3.900 and +4.100V. Notethat a value of +4.096V is recommended. The value entered will be used in the following step.
14. Using the Volts DC Calibrator, apply the reference calibration voltage (from the previous step) to
Analog Input channel 2.
If the reference voltage is not found: The program aborts the process and prompts you to double checkthe reference voltage for Analog Input 2H with respect to Analog Input 2L.
If the reference voltage is found: Personal Daq’s LED flashes and UserCal prompts you to select“Next.” This step ensures that the Personal Daq is properly configured and can acquire data.
15. Apply 0.000V to Analog Input channel 2. Select “Next.”
16. Apply the positive reference voltage (from step 13) to Analog Input channel 2. Select “Next.”
17. Apply the negative reference voltage (from step 13) to Analog Input channel 2. Select “Next.”
Note: If UserCal sees any of the three voltages (zero reference, positive reference, or negative reference)
as incorrect, the program informs the user and aborts.
18. If Thermocouple calibration was selected, calibrate each CJC channel as prompted by UserCal.

6-4

Calibration

878395

Personal Daq User’s Manual

19. If your Personal Daq is connected to an expansion module:- remove the USB cable from the Personal Daq main unit
- if used in your application, remove the external power cable from the Personal Daq main unit
- carefully remove the retaining clips from the Personal Daq modules- remove the expansion module from the main unit
- if a power adapter was used, reconnect the adapter cable to the Personal Daq main unit
- reconnect the USB cable to Personal Daq main unit
Note: For step 20, it is recommended that you make a simple harness from a DB25 male connector to
avoid damaging Personal Daq’s expansion connector. A properly made harness will also ensure
good pin contact. (See following figure).

20.

Connect the multimeter positive lead to pin number 24 and the negative lead to pin number 13(note the harness in the preceding figure). Measure the reference voltage at Personal Daq’s
expansion port, and note the value for use in the following step.

21.

Using the keypad of your PC or laptop, enter the reference value obtained from step 20. Select“Next.” UserCal now calculates calibration constants and stores them in Personal Daq’s serial
EEPROM. UserCal displays a brief calibration report.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878395

Calibration

6-5

22.

Disconnect the calibration equipment from the Personal Daq•
VDC Calibrator•
Harness and multimeter•copper short (remove from Analog In 2L and Personal Daq common low (COM)The calibration procedure is complete. You may now return your Personal Daq system to its dataacquisition status.

6-6

Calibration

878395

Personal Daq User’s ManualTroubleshooting & Customer Assistance

7

Radio Frequency Interference …… 7-1
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) …… 7-1
Troubleshooting …… 7-2
Customer Assistance …… 7-5

Reference Note:
API Error Codes are defined at the end of Appendix B.

Radio Frequency Interference
Personal Daq hardware complies with the limits for a Class B digital device according to FCC rules and CE
specifications. These limits provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
environment.
If not installed or used correctly, this equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and interfere with radio
communications. You can determine if the interference is caused by the Personal Daq system by disconnecting and then reconnecting the Personal Daq while observing the effect on the interference.
You can often correct radio interference by one or both of the following measures:• Antenna Adjustment: Reorient the receiving antenna.
• Spatial Separation: Increase the separation between the Personal Daq equipment and thereceiver of the device experiencing interference.
If the problem cannot be resolved, consult an experienced radio/television technician for help.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins
or circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate
ESD controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded matsand wrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

887095

Troubleshooting & Customer Assistance

7-1

Troubleshooting
Certain problems can be solved without factory assistance. Before calling your service representative you
should go through the following checklist, as well as the symptoms and solutions. When applicable, besure to follow ESD prevention guidelines to avoid damaging components.

Basic ChecklistPower. Check USB cable and connections. Check hub connections and power adapters, whenapplicable. If using a laptop computer, ensure the laptop’s battery is sufficiently charged.



Signal. Check signal lines and connections. Connectors must be free of corrosion. Signal lines
should be undamaged and free of sharp bends and twists. Signal paths should avoid potential
sources of noise (high voltage and electromagnetic interference).

Software. Try to acquire data with Personal DaqView. If you are unable to acquire data in both
Personal DaqView and another program, a hardware problem is likely.



Setup Parameters. Make sure the device selected in software matches the hardware being used.
Verify that setup parameters are correct for your application.

Symptoms and Solutions
1. Personal DaqView will not install properly.
Check your computer’s Window’s Operating System. Systems preceding Windows 2000 or Windows
XP are not to be used with Personal DaqView.
If your computer is already using Windows 2000 or XP, make sure that you have installed the latest
version of Personal DaqView. To check on the version you are running, open Personal DaqView’s
Help pull-down menu and select "About Personal DaqView..."
If you need to update your version of Personal DaqView, first uninstall your existing version. This canbe done using the Add/Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel. Install the new versionof Personal DaqView after the older version has been removed. The executable file for Personal
DaqView can be obtained from a recent data acquisition CD or from our web site.
2. Personal DaqView seems to run fine, but the data does not make sense.
Check the blue title bar at the top of the Personal DaqView screen. If you see the word “Simulated” inparentheses, it means that the Personal Daq is running in a simulated mode and is generating artificial
data.
To leave the simulated mode:(a) Select Active Devices from the View pull-down menu.
(b) Uncheck the Simulated Device.
(c) Check the real Personal Daq device. Note that the real devices, which are listed as active
devices, include a serial number as part of their identification.
If the data is awkward when coming from a real device, have the device calibrated according to the
instructions in chapter 6 of the user’s manual. A PDF version of the document is included on the dataacquisition CD. If the calibration fails, see page 7-5 in regard to customer assistance.

7-2

Troubleshooting & Customer Assistance878495

Personal Daq User’s Manual

3.

There is a “blue screen” or an error message when connecting the Personal Daq to the PC.
Many notebook computers fail to meet the 500 mA current that is specified by the USB standard and,in fact, will not even supply the 400 mA that is required by the Personal Daq. If this is the case you
will need to use an auxiliary power supply as follows:(a) Unplug the USB cable from the Personal Daq.
(b) Obtain a power adapter that provides an output voltage of 6 to 16 VDC and a maximum
current output of 500 mA.
(c) Connect the adapter’s power in line to a suitable power source.
(d) Connect the adapter’s power-out line to the Personal Daq’s External Power connector.
(e) Reconnect the USB cable to the Personal Daq.

4.

Personal DaqView was not installed prior to the hardware.
Personal DaqView should have been installed before connecting and installing the hardware. If you
installed the hardware first you will need to complete the following steps.
(a) Access the Windows Device Manager. This can be done from the Start menu by navigating
as follows:
Start ® Settings ® Control Panel ® System ® Hardware ® Device Manager**Depending on the operating system, access to the Device Manager might be obtained directly from System.

(b) Scroll down the list and look for “pDaq” or “Personal Daq.” If neither is found, look for“Unknown Device.” The latter will have a yellow question mark next to it.
(c) Select the device (found in step “b”), and remove it by clicking on the <Remove> button.
(d) Unplug the USB cable from the Personal Daq.
(e) If you have not already done so, install Personal DaqView on the computer.
(f) Reconnect the USB cable to the Personal Daq. This should start the driver install process andthe Personal Daq should now show up in the Device Manager list.
5. Personal DaqView appears to run fine with one Personal Daq, but not with two or more.
You need to have the Plus version of Personal DaqView if you want to use more than one Personal
Daq device. To see whether or not you have the Plus version, check the blue title bar at the top of the
Personal DaqView screen. If it does not indicate “Personal DaqView Plus” you will need to order itfrom the factory. Otherwise it will not be possible to run Personal DaqView with multiple devices.
6. When running Personal DaqView under Windows 2000 or Windows XP the computer “bluescreens” when the Personal Daq is connected and the driver is loaded.
This problem should not be seen if you are using a current driver. If you are experiencing a “bluescreen” when the driver is being loaded, verify that you are installing the latest driver.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

878495

Troubleshooting & Customer Assistance

7-3

7. Personal DaqView runs fine with analog inputs, but “blue screens” with frequency inputs.
When sampling frequency channels, be sure to have at least one analog input channel active.
This will prevent the “blue screen” state.
8. The Personal DaqView window stays minimized.
If this happens the Personal DaqView window is actually "restored" but its position is off the screen.
You can resolve this problem as follows:(a) Run Personal DaqView.
(b) In the task bar, right-click on the Personal DaqView icon. Note that “Restore” is probably
grayed out.
(c) Select "Move" with a left-click and without moving the mouse; take your hand off the mouse.
(d) Press any one of the 4 arrow keys on your keyboard; then move the mouse until you see thewindow (or possibly the outline of the window) positioned where you want it.
(e) Left-click. The window should be back to normal.
(f) Resize and relocate the window as desired.
(g) Select "Save" from the File menu to save your configuration including the new window
location and size.
Note: If you need to open up the Channel Configuration window, you can do so by going to theView pull-down menu and selecting “Channel Configuration.”

7-4

Troubleshooting & Customer Assistance878495

Personal Daq User’s ManualCustomer Assistance
Reference Notes:
Before calling for assistance . . .
• Refer to the portions of this manual relevant to your situation, especially the troubleshooting
material.
•

Refer to Appendix B, API Commands, if you are creating your own programs. The appendix lists
command functions in alpha-numerical order and includes error code definitions.

To report problems and receive support, call your service representative. When you call, please have thefollowing information available:••••

Hardware model numbers
Contents of your CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT, and SYSTEM.INI files
Software version numbers for Personal DaqView, DOS and Windows
Type of computer and features

All equipment returned to the factory must be accompanied by an RMA# (Return Merchandise
Authorization number). Use original shipping containers or equivalent to prevent shipping damage.
In addition to inclusion of the above information, please include:•••

Personal Daq User’s Manual

The name and phone number of an individual who can discuss the problems encounteredYour shipping instructions
A copy of troubleshooting notes and comments on tests performed and all problem-related
conditions.

878495

Troubleshooting & Customer Assistance

7-5

7-6

Troubleshooting & Customer Assistance878495

Personal Daq User’s ManualAppendices

Appendix A ⎯ API Custom Program Models
Appendix B ⎯ API Commands
Appendix C ⎯ Removed
Appendix D ⎯ Custom Labels

Note: The information in appendices A and B pertains to the Applications Programming Interface (API).
This information is not necessary for users of Personal DaqView who plan to do no programming.

Synopsis of Appendices
Appendix A: API Custom Program Models provides information for creating custom software to satisfy yourspecific data acquisition requirements. The appendix explains how to combine API functions to perform
typical tasks.
Appendix B: API Commands describes the entire command set for the Personal Daq. Syntax, parameters,interpretation, and error codes are explained. Sections on the individual commands include their parameters,
types, typical use, and related information.
Appendix C: Removed
Appendix D: Custom Labels provides blank labels and a Personal Daq channel layout reference. The appendix
also pertains to pDaq_CustomLabels.doc. The file is located in the target directory: \\Program
Files\pDaqView. The file document provides blank labels in table format that you can write in, edit, andprint from your PC.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

887595A-i

A-ii

Personal DaqView User’s Manual

API Custom Program Models

A

Overview ……A-1
Data Acquisition Environment ……A-1
Application Programming Interface (API) ……A-1
Hardware Capabilities and Constraints ……A-2
Signal Environment ……A-2

Programming Models ……A-2
Initialization and Error Handling ……A-3
Foreground Acquisition with One-Step Commands ……A-4
Counted Acquisitions Using Linear Buffers ……A-5
Indefinite Acquisition, Direct-To-Disk Using Circular Buffers ……A-7
Multiple Channel Types……A-10

Summary Guide of Selected API Functions ……A-14

Overview
By using the Application Programming Interface (API) with Personal Daq systems, you can create custom
software to satisfy your data acquisition requirements. Appendix B explains the API functions in detail.
This appendix shows how to combine API functions to perform typical tasks. When you understand how
the API works with the hardware, you are ready to program for optimum data acquisition. To help you get
this perspective, this appendix is divided into 3 parts:• Data Acquisition Environment outlines related concepts and defines Personal Daq capabilities the
programmer must work with (the API, hardware features, and signal management).
• Programming Models explains the sequence and type of operations necessary for data acquisition.
These models provide the software building blocks to develop more complex and specialized
programs. The description for each model has a flowchart and program excerpt to show how the
API functions work.
• Summary Guide of Selected API Functions is an easy-to-read table that describes when to use thebasic API functions.

Data Acquisition Environment
In order to write effective data acquisition software, programmers must understand:• Software tools (the API documented in this manual and the programming language—you may needto consult documentation for your chosen language)• Hardware capabilities and constraints• General concepts of data acquisition and signal management

Application Programming Interface (API)The API includes all the software functions needed for building a data acquisition system with the
hardware described in this manual. Appendix B (API Commands) supplies the details about how eachfunction is used (parameters, hardware applicability, etc). In addition, you may need to consult yourlanguage and computer documentation.

Hardware Capabilities and Constraints
To program the system effectively, you must understand your Personal Daq hardware capabilities.
Obviously you cannot program the hardware to perform beyond its design and specifications, but you also
want to take full advantage of the system’s power and features. You may need to refer to manual chaptersthat pertain to hardware capability. In addition, you may need to consult your computer documentation. In
some cases, you may need to verify the hardware setup, use of channels, and signal conditioning options.

Signal Environment
Important data acquisition concepts for programmers are listed below. You should also refer toAppendix C, Signal Management and Troubleshooting, to gain a better understanding of signal-related
issues. These include:
Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 887095

API Custom Program Modules

A-1

•
•
•
•
•

Channel Identification
Scan Rates and Sequencing With multiple scans, the time between scans becomes a parameter.
This time can be a constant or can be dependent upon a trigger.
Counter/Timer Operation
Triggering Options Triggering starts the A/D conversion. The trigger can be an external analog or
TTL trigger, or a program controlled software trigger.
Foreground/Background Foreground routines ( …Rd routines) require the entire transfer tooccur before returning control to the application program. Background routines ( … Transfer
routines) start the A/D acquisition and return control to the application program before the transfer
occurs. Data is transferred while the application program is running. Data will be transferred to theuser memory buffer during program execution in 1 or more sample blocks, depending on theconfiguration. The programmer must determine what tasks can proceed in the background whileother tasks perform in the foreground and how often the status of the background operations should
be checked.

Parameters in the various A/D routines include: number of channels, number of scans, start of conversion
triggering, timing between scans, and mode of data transfer. Channels can be sampled in consecutive or
non-consecutive order with the same [or different] gains. The scan sequence makes no distinction between
local and expansion channels.

Programming Models
Note:

Two types of VB function wrappers exist for the API functions that reference data buffers. One
type references an integer buffer, and the other references a single-precision floating point buffer.
The wrappers that reference single-precision floating point buffers have the word Single
appended to the function name. For example, VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle would be
used to set a single-precision floating point buffer, whereas VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer beused to set an integer buffer.

This section outlines basic programming steps commonly used for data acquisition. Consider the models
as building blocks that can be put together in different ways or modified as needed. As a general tutorial,
these examples use Visual Basic since most programmers know BASIC and can translate to otherlanguages as needed. The following table identifies the API programming models discussed in thisappendix.
Model Type

Model Name

Page

Configuration

Initialization and Error HandlingA-2

Acquisition

Foreground Acquisition with One-Step Commands
Counted Acquisition Using Linear Buffers
Indefinite Acquisition, Direct-To-Disk Using Circular Buffers
Multiple Channel Types

A-4
A-5
A-7
A-10

Initialization and Error HandlingThis section demonstrates how to initialize the Personal Daq
and use various methods of error handling.
Most of the example programs use similar coding as detailed
here. Functions used include:• VBdaqOpen&(daqName$)• VBdaqSetErrorHandler&(errHandler&)• VBdaqClose&(handle&)

A-2

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495

Personal Daq User’s ManualAll Visual Basic programs should include the PDAQX.BAS file into their project. The PDAQX.BAS fileprovides the necessary definitions and function prototyping for the DaqX driver DLL.
handle& = VBdaqOpen&(“PDAQ123456”)
ret& = VBdaqClose&(handle&)

The PersonalDaq device is opened and initialized with the daqOpen function. daqOpen takes one
parameter—the name of the device to be opened. The device name is the device serial# pre-prended with“PDAQ”.
For instance if the serial# for the Personal Daq is 123456 then the device name to use to open that device
would be “PDAQ123456”. The daqOpen call, if successful, will return a handle to the opened device.
This handle may then be used by other functions to configure or perform other operations on the device.
When operations with the device are complete, the device may then be closed using the daqClose
function. If the device could not be found or opened, daqOpen will return -1.
The DaqX library has a default error handler defined upon loading. However; if it is desirable to change
the error handler or to disable error handling, then the daqSetErrorHandler function may be used tosetup an error handler for the driver. In the following example the error handler is set to 0 (no handler
defined) which disables error handling.
ret& = VBdaqSetErrorHandler&(0&)

If there is a Personal Daq error, the program will continue. The function’s return value (an error number or
0 if no error) can help you debug a program.
If (VBdaqOpen&(“PDAQ123456”) <“Cannot open PDaq”

0) Then

Personal Daq functions return daqErrno&.
Print “daqErrno& : ”; HEX$(daqErrno&)
End If

The next statement defines an error handling routine that frees us from checking the return value of every
Personal Daq function call. Although not necessary, this sample program transfers program control to auser-defined routine when an error is detected. Without a Personal Daq error handler, Visual Basic will
receive and handle the error, post it on the screen and terminate the program. Visual Basic provides aninteger variable (ERR) that contains the most recent error code. This variable can be used to detect theerror source and take the appropriate action. The function daqSetErrorHandler tells Visual Basic toassign ERR to a specific value when a Personal Daq error is encountered. The following line tells Visual
Basic to set ERR to 100 when a Personal Daq error is encountered. Other languages work similarly; referto specific language documentation as needed.
handle& = VBdaqOpen&(“PDAQ123456”)
ret& = VBdaqSetErrorHandler&(handle&, 100)On Error GoTo ErrorHandler

The On Error GoTo command in Visual Basic allows a user-defined error handler to be provided,
rather than the standard error handler that Visual Basic uses automatically. The program uses On Error
GoTo to transfer program control to the routine ErrorHandler if an error is encountered.
Personal Daq errors will send the program into the error handling routine. This is the error handler.
Program control is sent here on error.
ErrorHandler:errorString$ = "ERROR in ADC1"
errorString$ = errorString$ & Chr(10) & "BASIC Error :" + Str$(Err)If Err = 100 Then errorString$ = errorString$ & Chr(10) & "DaqBook Error: " + Hex$(daqErrno&)
MsgBox errorString$, , "Error!"
End Sub

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 878495

API Custom Program Modules

A-3

Foreground Acquisition with One-Step Commands

daqAdcRd

This section shows the use of several one-step analog input routines. These
commands are easier to use than low-level commands but less flexible in scan
User Codeconfiguration. These commands provide a single function call to configure
and acquire analog input data. This example demonstrates the use of four
Personal Daq one-step ADC functions. Functions used include:•••

daqAdcRdN

VBdaqAdcRdSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal chan&,sample!, ByVal gain&, ByVal flags&)
VBdaqAdcRdNSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal chan&,User Codebuf!(), ByVal ScanCount&, ByVal triggerSource&,
ByVal rising&, ByVal level%, ByVal Freq!, ByVal
gain&, ByVal flags&)
daqAdcRdScan
VBdaqAdcRdScanSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal
startChan&, ByVal endChan&, buf!(), ByVal gain&, ByVal
flags&)
User CodeRead 1 sample from
1 channel.
At this point, the data is in
the buffer provided by theuser in binary format.
Read multiple samples from
1 channel.
At this point, the data is in
the buffer provided by theuser in binary format.
Read 1 sample from multiple
channels.

At this point, the data is in
the buffer provided by theuser in binary format.

This program will initialize the Personal Daq hardware, then take readings from the analog input channels in the baseunit (not the expansion module). For transporting data in and out of the Personal Daq driver, arrays are dimensioned.
Dim sample!(1), buf!(80), handle&, ret&, flags&, gain&

The following code assumes that the Personal Daq device has been successfully opened and the handle& value is avalid handle to the device. All the following one-step functions define the channel scan groups to be analog unipolar
input channels. Specifying this configuration uses the DafAnalog value in the flags parameter. The flags
parameter is a bit-mask field in which each bit specifies the characteristics of the channel(s) specified. In this case,
the DafAnalog value is used as the bit mask for the specified flags parameter.
The next line requests 1 reading from 1 channel with a gain of ×1. The variable PgainX1& is actually a definedconstant from PDAQX.BAS.
ret& = VBdaqAdcRdSingle&(handle&, 1, sample!(0), PGainX1&, DafAnalog)
Print "Result of AdcRd: " & Format$(Str$(sample%(0)), "0000")

The next line requests 10 readings from channel 1 at a gain of ×1, using immediate triggering at 1 kHz.
ret& = VBdaqAdcRdNSingle&(handle&, 1, buf!(), 10, DatsImmediate&, 0, 0, 1000!, _PGainX1&, DafAnalog)
Print "Results of AdcRdN: ";For x& = 0 To 9
Print Format$(str$(buf%(x&)), "#### ");Next x&The program will then collect one sample of channels 1 through 8 using the VBdaqAdcRdScan function.
ret& = VBdaqAdcRdScanSingle&(handle&, 1, 8, buf!(), PGainX1&, DafAnalog)
Print "Results of AdcRdN: ";For x& = 0 To 7
Print "Channel: " & Str$(x + 1) & " Data: " + Format$(buf%(x&), "####
Next x&

A-4

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495")

Personal Daq User’s ManualCounted Acquisitions Using Linear Buffers
This section sets up an acquisition that collects
post-trigger A/D scans. This particular example
demonstrates the setting up and collection of a
fixed-length A/D acquisition in a linear buffer.
First, the acquisition is configured by setting up
the channel scan group configuration, theacquisition frequency, the acquisition trigger
and the acquisition mode. When configured, theacquisition is then armed by calling thedaqAdcArm function.
At this point, the Personal Daq device trigger isarmed and A/D acquisition will begin upontrigger detection. If the trigger source has been
configured to be DatsImmediate&, A/Ddata collection will begin immediately.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Define a channel
scan group.

DaqAdcSetRate

Set the samplingrate.

daqAdcSetAcq

Configure a counted
acquisition for 10
post-trigger scans.

DaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced

Set the trigger event
to be immediate.

Configure an ADC transfer
daqAdcTransferSetBuffer data buffer to be 10 scanslong and terminate once theend of the buffer is reached.
Initiate a transfer into thedaqAdcTransferStart
configured buffer.

This example will retrieve 10 samples fromchannels 1 through 8, triggered immediately
with a 10 Hz sampling frequency and unity gain[for Personal Daq]. Functions used include:•

daqAdcSetMux

daqAdcArm

Arm the acquisition. Since
trigger source is immediate,
the acquisition begins now.

daqWaitForEvent

Wait for the acquisition tocomplete.

Process the data.
VBdaqAdcSetMux&(handle&,
User program code
startChan&, endChan&, gain&,flags&)
VBdaqAdcSetRate&(handle&,
Mode&, acqState&, regRate!, actualRate!)
Function VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(handle&, triggerSources&(), gains&(),adcRanges&(), trigSense&(), levels!(), hysteresis!(), chan&(), ChanCount&,
opstr$)
VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(handle&,mode&,preTrigCount&,postTrigCount&)
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(ByVal handle&, buf!(), ByVal ScanCount&,
ByVal transferMask&)
VBdaqAdcTransferStart&(handle&)
VBdaqWaitForEvent&(handle&,daqEvent&)

This program will initialize the Personal Daq hardware, then take readings from the analog input channels
in the base unit (not the expansion channels). The functions used in this program are of a lower level thanthose used in the previous section and provide more flexibility.
Dim buf!(80), handle&, ret&, flags&

The following function defines the channel scan group. The function specifies a channel scan group fromchannel 1 through 8 with all channels being analog unipolar input channels with a gain of ×1. Specifying
this configuration uses PgainX1 in the gain parameter and the DafAnalog value in the flags
parameter. The flags parameter is a bit-mask field in which each bit specifies the characteristics of thespecified channel(s). Although each channel can set up independently (and different from the others) inthis example we will set them all the same.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetMux&(handle&,1, 8, PgainX1&,
DafAnalog&+DafDifferential&+DafMeasDuration610&)

Next, set the internal sample rate to 10 Hz.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetRate&(handle&,DarmFrequency&,DaasPostTrig&,10!,actual!)

The acquisition mode needs to be configured to be fixed length acquisition with no pre-trigger scan data
and 10 scans of post-trigger scan data. The mode is set to DaamNShot&, which will configure theacquisition as a fixed-length acquisition that will terminate automatically upon the satisfaction of the posttrigger count of 10.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(handle&,DaamNShot&, 0, 10)

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 878495

API Custom Program Modules

A-5

The acquisition begins upon detection of the trigger event. The trigger event is configured with
daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced. The next line defines the trigger event to be the immediate trigger source.
This is the source that will start the acquisition immediately. The variable DatsImmediate& is aconstant defined in PDAQX.BAS. Since the trigger source is configured as immediate, the other trigger
parameters are not applied, but the arrays (adcRanges and trigSense) must still be initialized.
For i = 0 To ChanCount - 1
trgSrc&(i) = DatsImmediate&
adcRanges&(i) = 0
trigSense&(i) = 0
levels!(i) = 0
hysteresis!(i) = 0
Next iret& = VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(handle&, trgSrc&(), gains&(), adcRanges&(),trigSense&(), levels!(), hysteresis!(), chans&(), 0, "")A buffer now is configured to hold the A/D data to be acquired. Since this is to be a fixed length transfer
to a linear buffer, the buffer cycle mode should be turned off with DatmCycleOff&. The buffer size is
set to 10 scans.
Note: The user-defined buffer must have been allocated with sufficient storage to hold the entire transfer
prior to invoking the following line:
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(handle&, buf!(), 10, DatmUpdateBlock+ DatmCycleOff)

With all acquisition parameters being configured, the acquisition can now be armed. Once armed, theacquisition will begin immediately upon detection of the trigger event. As in the case of the immediate
trigger, the acquisition will begin immediately upon execution of the daqAdcArm function.
ret& = VBdaqAdcArm&(handle&)

After setting up and arming the acquisition, the data is immediately ready to be collected. Had the trigger
source been anything other than immediate, the data would only be ready after the trigger had beensatisfied. The following line initiates an A/D transfer from the Personal Daq device to the defined user
buffer.
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferStart&(handle&)

Wait for the transfer to complete in its entirety, then proceed with normal application processing.
This can be accomplished with the daqWaitForEvent command. The daqWaitForEvent allows
the application processing to become blocked until the specified event has occurred. DteAdcDone,
indicates that the event to wait for is the completion of the transfer.
ret& = VBdaqWaitForEvent(handle&,DteAdcDone&)At this point, the transfer is complete; all data from the acquisition is available for further processing.
Print "Results of Transfer:"
For i& = 0 To 9
Print "Scan "; Format$(Str$(i& + 1), "00"); " -->";For k& = k& To k& + 7
Print Format$(Str$(buf%(k&)), "00000"); "";Next k&Print
Next i&

A-6

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495

Personal Daq User’s ManualIndefinite Acquisition, Direct-To-Disk Using Circular
Buffers
This program demonstrates the use of circular buffers in cycle
mode to collect analog input data directly to disk. In cycle mode,
this data transfer can continue indefinitely. When the transfer
reaches the end of the physical data array, it will reset its arraypointer back to the beginning of the array and continue writing
data to it. Thus, the allocated buffer can be used repeatedly like a
FIFO buffer.

daqAdcSetScan

Configure a scangroup of channels.

DaqAdcSetRate

Set the samplingrate.

daqAdcSetAcq

Configure the acquisition
to be indefinite post-trigger.

The API has built-in direct-to-disk functionality. Therefore, very
little needs to be done by the application to configure direct-todisk operations.

DaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced

Configure the trigger event
to be software trigger.

daqAdcTransferSetBuffer

Configure a circular acquisitionbuffer 10,000 scans in length.

daqAdcSetDiskFile

Open the disk file and make it
ready to receive A/D Data.

First, the acquisition is configured by setting up the channel scangroup configuration, the acquisition frequency, the acquisition
trigger and the acquisition mode. Once configured, the transfer
to disk is set up and the acquisition is armed by calling thedaqAdcArm function.
At this point, the Personal Daq device trigger is armed and A/D
acquisition to disk will begin immediately upon trigger detection.

daqAdcTransferStart

This example will retrieve an indefinite amount of scans forchannels 1 through 8, triggered via software with a 3 Hz
sampling frequency and unity gain. Functions used include:• VBdaqAdcSetScan&(handle&, channels&(),
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Arm the acquisition.

daqAdcArm

daqAdcSoftTrig

DaqWaitForEvent
gains&(), flags&(), ChanCount&)
VBdaqAdcSetRate&(handle&,mode&,state&,requested!,actual!)
daqAdcTransferGetStat
Function
VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(handle&,
triggerSources&(), gains&(),No
User
adcRanges&(), trigSense&(), levels!(),Terminatorhysteresis!(), chan&(), ChanCount&,
Yes
opstr$)
VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(handle&,mode&,preTrigCoun
daqAdcDisarm
t&,postTrigCount&)
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(handle&,
buf!(), ScanCount&, transferMask&)
VBdaqAdcTransferStart&(handle&)
VBdaqAdcTransferGetStat&(handle&,status&,retCount&)
VBdaqWaitForEvent&(handle&,daqEvent&)
VBdaqAdcSetDiskFile&(handle&,filename$,openMode&,preWrite&)

Initiate data transfer to disk
(no data will transfer until
trigger event occurs).
Trigger the acquisition.
Wait for data to
become available.
Check status of transfer.

User code to determine
if transfer should stop.
Transfer is complete;disarm the acquisition.

This program will initialize the Personal Daq hardware, then take readings from the analog input channels in the baseunit (not the expansion channels) and store them to disk automatically. The following lines demonstrate channel scangroup configuration using the daqAdcSetScan command.
Note: Flags may be channel-specific.
Dim handle&, ret&, channels&(8), gains&(8) flags&(8)Dim buf!(80,000), active&, count&Dim bufsize&
bufsize& = 10000

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 878495

API Custom Program Modules

A-7

' Define arrays of channels and gains : 1-8 , unity gain
For x& = 0 To 7
channels&(x&) = x& + 1
gains&(x&) = PgainX1&
flags&(x&) = DafAnalog& + DafSingleEnded&
Next x&' Load scan sequence FIFO
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetScan&(handle&,channels&(), gains&(), flags&(), 8)

The acquisition mode needs to be configured to be fixed-length acquisition with no pre-trigger scan data
and 10 scans of post-trigger scan data. The mode is set to DaamInfinitePost&, which will configure
the acquisition as having indefinite length and, as such, will be terminated by the application. In this mode,the pre- and post-trigger count values are ignored.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(handle&,DaamInfinitePost&, 0, 0)

Next, set the internal sample rate to 3 Hz.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetRate&(handle&,DarmFrequency&,DaasPostTrig&,3!,actual!)

The acquisition begins upon detection of the trigger event. The trigger event is configured with
(daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced). The next line defines the trigger event to be the immediate trigger source
which will start the acquisition immediately. The variable DatsSoftware& is a constant defined in
PDAQX.BAS. Since the trigger source is configured as immediate, the other trigger parameters are notneeded.
TrigSource& = DatsSoftware&
For i = 0 To 7
trgSrc&(i) = DatsSoftware&adcRanges&(i) = 0
trigSense&(i) = 0
levels!(i) = 0
hysteresis!(i) = 0
Next iret& = VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(handle&, trgSrc&(), gains&(), adcRanges&(),trigSense&(), levels!(), hysteresis!(), channels&(), 0, "")A buffer now is configured to hold the A/D data to be acquired. This buffer is necessary to hold incoming
A/D data while it is being prepared for disk I/O. Since this is to be an indefinite-length transfer to acircular buffer, the buffer cycle mode should be turned on with DatmCycleOn&. For efficiency, block
update mode is specified with DatmUpdateSingle&. The buffer size is set to 10,000 scans. The buffer
size indicates only the size of the circular buffer, not the total number of scans to be taken.
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(handle&, buf!(), bufsize&,
DatmUpdateSingle& + DatmCycleOn&)

Note:

Two types of VB function wrappers exist for the API functions that reference data buffers. One
type references an integer buffer, and the other references a single-precision floating point buffer.
The wrappers that reference single-precision floating point buffers have the word Single
appended to the function name. For example, VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle would be
used to set a single-precision floating point buffer, whereas VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer beused to set an integer buffer.

Now the destination disk file is configured and opened. For this example, the disk file is a new file to becreated by the driver. After the following line has been executed, the specified file will be opened andready to accept data.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetDiskFile&(handle&,”c:pdaqdata.bin”, DaomCreateFile&, 0)With all acquisition parameters being configured and the acquisition transfer to disk configured, theacquisition can now be armed. Once armed, the acquisition will begin immediately upon detection of thetrigger event. As in the case of the immediate trigger, the acquisition will begin immediately upon
execution of the daqAdcArm function.
ret& = VBdaqAdcArm&(handle&)

A-8

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495

Personal Daq User’s ManualAfter setting up and arming the acquisition, data collection will begin upon satisfaction of the trigger event.
Since the trigger source is software, the trigger event will not take place until the application issues thesoftware trigger event. To prepare for the trigger event, the following line initiates an A/D transfer fromthe Daq* device to the defined user buffer and, subsequently, to the specified disk file. No data istransferred at this point, however.
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferStart&(handle&)

The transfer has been initiated, but no data will be transferred until the trigger event occurs. The following
line will signal the software trigger event to the driver; then A/D input data will be transferred to thespecified disk file as it is being collected.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSoftTrig&(handle&)

Both the acquisition and the transfer are now currently active. The transfer to disk will continue
indefinitely until terminated by the application. The application can monitor the transfer process with thefollowing lines of code:
acqTermination& = 0
Do‘ Wait here for new data to arrive
ret& = VBdaqWaitForEvent(handle&,DteAdcData&)‘ New data has been transferred - Check status
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferGetStat&(handle&,active&,retCount&)‘ Code may be placed here which will process the buffered data or‘ perform other application activities.
‘‘ At some point the application needs to determine the event on which‘ the direct-to-disk acquisition is to be halted and set the‘ acqTermination flag.
Loop While acqTermination& = 0

At this point the application is ready to terminate the acquisition to disk. The following line will terminate
the acquisition to disk and will close the disk file.
ret& = VBdaqAdcDisarm&(handle&)

The acquisition as well as the data transfer has been stopped. We should check status one more time to get
the total number of scans actually transferred to disk.
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferGetStat(handle&,active&,retCount&)

The specified disk file is now available. The retCount& parameter will indicate the total number ofscans transferred to disk.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 878495

API Custom Program Modules

A-9

Multiple Channel Types
This section demonstrates how to configure
multiple channels on a Personal Daq andacquire data using these channels in thesame scan sequence. After all of the priorcode has been executed, the transfer can bestarted and the acquisition can be armed in
the same manner as shown in the othermodels. Functions used include:•

DaqGetDeviceList

Obtain list of installed
devices.

DaqGetDeviceProperties Obtain properties of eachdevice in the device list.

No

Is Device a
PDAQ56?

VBdaqGetDeviceList&(ByRef
deviceList() As String, ByRef
Yes
deviceCount&)• VBdaqGetDeviceProperties&(ByVal
Open the first Personal Daq/56
DaqOpendaqName$, deviceProps As
device found.
DaqDevicePropsT)• VBdaqOpen&(ByVal daqName$)
DaqSetOption
Set channel options.
• VBdaqSetErrorHandler&(ByVal
handle&, ByVal handler&)• VBdaqSetOption&(ByVal handle&,
Set format of data returned by
DaqAdcSetDataFormat
ByVal chan&, ByVal flags&,
the transfer functions.
ByVal optionType&, ByVal
optionValue!)
Configure a scan group of
DaqAdcSetScan• VBdaqAdcSetDataFormat&(ByVal
channels.
handle&, ByVal RawDataFormat&,
ByVal PostProcFormat&)• VBdaqAdcSetScan&(ByVal handle&,
DaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced Configure the trigger event.
channels&(), gains&(),flags&(), ByVal ChanCount&)• VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(ByVal
DaqAdcSetAcq
Configure the acquisition.
handle&, ByRef
triggerSources&(), ByRef
gains&(), ByRefadcRanges&(),Set the sample rate
DaqAdcSetRate
ByRef trigSense&(), ByRef(sample frequency).
levels!(), ByRef hysteresis!(),
ByRef chan&(), ChanCount&,
opstr$)
DaqAdcTransferSetBuffer Configure acquisition buffer.
• VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(ByVal handle&,
ByVal Mode&, ByVal
preTrigCount&, ByVal
Multiple Channel Types Model for Personal Daq/56
postTrigCount&)• VBdaqAdcSetRate&(ByVal handle&, ByVal Mode&, ByVal acqState&, ByVal regRate!, ByRef
actualRate!)• VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(ByVal handle&, buf!(), ByVal ScanCount&, ByValtransferMask&)

The definitions below will be used to specify the channel count, scan count, data buffer size, starting
channel, and acquisition clock frequency respectively. This model assumes the use of a Personal Daq/56
device, on which there are 10 analog input channels, 2 digital I/O ports, and 4 frequency input channels
available that will be configured for use in the same scan sequence. The acquisition will consist of 10scans per channel. The first channel in the channel sequence array is 1. The rate at which channel scans
are collected is 0.1 Hz.
Const ChanCount& = 16
Const ScanCount& = 10
Const TotalCount& = (ScanCount& * ChanCount&)
Const startChan = 1
Const Freq! = 0.1

We define constants for the various flags that will be placed in the flag sequence array. The flags that are
ultimately placed in the array depend on the channel type of the channel specified in the same subscript of
the channel sequence array.
Const CtrFlags& = DafCtrPulse Or DafScanDigital
Const DigFlags& = DafScanDigital
Const FreqFlags& = DafCtrFreq Or DafScanDigital
Const AnaFlags& = DafAnalog Or DafDifferential Or DafMeasDuration610

A-10

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495

Personal Daq User’s Manual

The handle& variable will be assigned a handle to an opened Personal Daq/56 device using the
VBDaqOpen function. This handle must be used with most API functions. The data buffer consists ofsingle precision floating-point elements, the number of which is proportional to the product of the scancount and the channel count. The variable i is a counter variable that is used to perform iteration
operations.
Dim handle&
Dim buf!(TotalCount&)
Dim i&The deviceList string array, which is initialized using the VBDaqGetDeviceList function, is used to hold alist of currently configured devices, and the deviceCount variable contains the number of devices in thedeviceList array.
Dim deviceList$()Dim deviceCount&

The following scan sequence arrays will be used to store channel numbers, the flags for the channels, andthe gain settings for the channels. If element 0 of the channel sequence array has a value of 1 (channel 1),
then element 0 of the flag and gain sequence arrays will pertain to the flags and gain settings of channel 1.
Dim chans&(ChanCount&)
Dim flags&(ChanCount&)
Dim gains&(ChanCount&)

In order to configure the trigger event, the five arrays shown below must be allocated. These arrays areallocated proportional to the channel count and follow the same order as the scan sequence arrays, in which
the first element corresponds to the setting pertaining to the first channel in the channel sequence array.
These arrays specify the source of the trigger event, appropriate polarity flags, sensitivity flags, analog
trigger levels, and hysteresis values.
Dim trgSrc&(ChanCount&)
Dim adcRanges&(ChanCount&)
Dim trigSense&(ChanCount&)
Dim levels!(ChanCount&)
Dim hysteresis!(ChanCount&)

When the VBDaqAdcSetRate function is used to configure the scan rate, the variable actualRate! willcontain the actual rate for which the device has been programmed in the event that the requested rate isunattainable. The ret& variable is used to hold the return code of all other DaqX function calls
Dim actualRate!
dim ret&A list of devices that are currently configured on the system along with the number of devices in the list
should be obtained using the VBDaqGetDeviceList function.
ret& = VBdaqGetDeviceList(deviceList, deviceCountOne of the methods used to dynamically locate and open a configured Personal Daq device is shown
below. The handle& variable is initialized to (-1) so it can be used at the end of the iteration to determine
if a device was successfully opened. The iteration on deviceIndex& will obtain the device properties foreach device in the device list and use the deviceType property to locate the first Personal Daq/56 device (ifany) that is installed and configured in the system. The first Personal Daq/56 that is found in the system isopened using the VBdaqOpen function, which returns a value of –1 if the specified device cannot be
opened, thus changing the value of the handle in the case that the device is successfully initialized.
handle& = -1
For deviceIndex& = 0 To deviceCount – 1
ret& = VBdaqGetDeviceProperties(deviceList(deviceIndex), deviceProps)
If deviceProps.DeviceType = PersonalDaq56 Thenhandle& = VBdaqOpen&(deviceList(deviceIndex))
Exit ForEnd IfNext deviceIndex&

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 878495

API Custom Program Modules

A-11

If the handle is still –1 at this point, we know that either a Personal Daq/56 device was not located on thesystem, or that whatever Personal Daq/56 device was located on the system could not be properly opened.
If handle& = -1 Then
Print "Cannot open PersonalDaq!"
Exit SubEnd IfAn iteration on the channel count is used to initialize the scan sequence arrays and configure the frequency
and pulse counter channels. The following table indicates the content of the scan sequence arrays after thisiteration is completed:
Subscript

Gain Sequence Arraygains()

ChannelSequence Array

Flag Sequence
Array

channels()

flags()

Analog Input Channels
0

PGainX1

1 (startChan)

AnaFlags

1

PGainX1

2

AnaFlags

2

PGainX1

3

AnaFlags

3

PGainX1

4

AnaFlags

4

PGainX1

5

AnaFlags

5

PGainX1

6

AnaFlags

6

PGainX1

7

AnaFlags

7

PGainX1

8

AnaFlags

8

PGainX1

9

AnaFlags

9

PGainX1

10

AnaFlags

Digital Ports( Does not apply to Personal Daq/54 )10

PGainX1

1 (startChan)

DigFlags

11

PGainX1

2

DigFlags

Frequency Input / Pulse Count Channels( Does not apply to Personal Daq/54 )12

PGainX1

1 (startChan)

FreqFlags

13

PGainX1

2

FreqFlags

14

PGainX1

3

CtrFlags

15

PGainX1

4

CtrFlags

For i = 0 To ChanCountIf (0 <= i) And (i < 10) Then
' Analog input channels
chans&(i) = startChan + 1
flags&(i) = AnaFlags
ElseIf (10 <= i) And (i < 12) Then
' Digital I/O ports
chans&(i) = startChan + (i - 10)
flags&(i) = DigFlags
ElseIf (12 <= i) And (i < 14) Then
' Frequency input channels configured for frequency inputchans&(i) = startChan + (i - 12)
flags&(i) = FreqFlags

The VBdaqSetOption function is used to set individual channel options. The sequence of calls below
configures the current channel chans&(i&) to measure 0 pulses per scan (DcotpDaqPulses) based on timemeasurements between the successive rising edges of the input signal, disables debouncing, sets theminimum and maximum values for the frequency range (maximum frequency range value is 1000 Hz), andconfigures the measurement rate to be 1 Hz.

A-12

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495

Personal Daq User’s Manualret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqPulses, DcovPulseCount)ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqRising,DcovEdgeRising)
ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqDebounceTime,
DcovDebounce0)
ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqMinFreq, 0!)
ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqMaxFreq, 1000!)
ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqFreqRes, 1!)
ElseIf (14 <= i) And (i < 16) Then
' Frequency input channels configured for pulse countchans&(i) = startChan + 2 + (i - 14)
flags&(i) = CtrFlags
ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqPulses, DcovPulseCount)ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqRising,DcovEdgeRising)
ret& = VBdaqSetOption(handle&, chans&(i&), DcofChannel, DcotpDaqDebounceTime,
DcovDebounce0)
End Ifgains(i) = PGainX1
Next iThe VBdaqAdcSetDataFormat function is used to configure the driver to return the raw data in floating point format, which
is a requirement for Personal Daq software. Post-acquisition data will be presented as raw data.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetDataFormat&(handle&, DardfFloat&, DappdfRaw)

The scan group consisting of multiple channels must be configured using the VBdaqAdcSetScan function.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetScan&(handle&, chans&(), gains&(), flags&(), ChanCount&)

The arrays used to specify the parameters of the trigger event are initialized prior to the invocation of the
VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced function, which will use the parameters to configure a trigger event for the acquisition. Basedon the parameters below, the acquisition will trigger immediately upon arming. The adcRanges&, trigSense&, levels!, andhysteresis! arrays are initialized, but the values will not affect the trigger event configuration, as DatsImmediate configures
an immediate trigger.
For i = 0 To ChanCount - 1
trgSrc&(i) = DatsImmediate&
adcRanges&(i) = DarBiMinus5to5V
trigSense&(i) = DetsRisingEdge&levels!(i) = 0
hysteresis!(i) = 0
Next iret& = VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(handle&, trgSrc&(), gains&(), adcRanges&(), _trigSense&(), levels!(), hysteresis!(), _chans&(), ChanCount&, "")Next, the acquisition mode is characterized as one that continues until the previously defined scan count has been satisfied.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(handle&, DaamNShot&, 0, ScanCount&)

The post-trigger scan rate is configured using the previously defined Freq! value, and the actualRate! variable is passed byreference to hold the actual rate for which the device was configured in the event that the requested rate could not be
configured.
ret& = VBdaqAdcSetRate&(handle&, DarmFrequency, DaasPostTrig, Freq!, actualRate!)

In VisualBASIC, there are two different function wrappers for the VBDaqAdcTransferSetBuffer function, one of which is shown below.
The other function wrapper is named VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer. The only difference between the two wrappers is manifested in the buf
parameter. There are essentially two different buffer types that can be used, one containing integer elements and the other containing
single precision floating-point elements. The VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle function should be called to use a single precision
floating-point buffer in VisualBASIC.
ret& = VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(handle&, buf!(), ScanCount&, DatmReturn)

Note:

This section, Multiple Channel Types, demonstrated the configuration of acquisitions using multiple channel types
in the same scan sequence. After all of the prior code has been executed, the transfer can be started and theacquisition can be armed in the same manner as shown in the other models.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix A, 878495

API Custom Program Modules

A-13

Summary Guide of Selected API Functions
Simple One-Step Routines
For single gain, consecutive channel, foreground transfers, use the following functions:
Foreground Operation
Single Scan
Multiple Scans
daqAdcRd
daqAdcRdN
Single Channel
daqAdcRdScan
daqAdcRdScanN
Consecutive Multiple Channels

Complex A/D Scan Group Configuration Routines
For non-consecutive channels, high-speed digital channels, multiple gain settings, or multiple polarity settings, use the SetScan
functions.
daqAdcSetScan
Set scan sequence using arrays of channel and gain values.
daqAdcSetMux
Set a contiguous scan sequence using single gain, polarity and channel flag values

Trigger Options
After the scan is set, the trigger needs to be set. If a software trigger is selected, the start time of the scan depends on theapplication calling daAdcSoftTrig.
DaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced Configures the device for enhanced triggering.

Multiple Scan Timing
If the acquisition is to have multiple scans and the trigger mode is one-shot, the pacer clock needs to be set with one of thefollowing functions:
daqAdcSetRate
Set/Get the specified frequency or period for the specified mode.
daqAdcSetFreq
Set the pacer clock to the given frequency.

A/D Acquisition
A/D acquisition settings are not active until the acquisition is armed.
daqAdcArm
Arm an A/D acquisition using the current configuration. If the trigger source was set to be immediate,
the acquisition will be triggered immediately.
daqAdcDisarm
Disarm the current acquisition if one is active. This command will disarm the current acquisition andterminate any current A/D transfers.
daqAdcSetAcq
Define the mode of the acquisition and set the pre-trigger and post-trigger acquisition counts, if
applicable.
daqAdcAcqGetStat
Return the current state of the acquisition as well as the total number of scans transferred thus far aswell as the trigger scan position, if applicable.

A/D Data Transfer
After the acquisition is started, the data needs to be transferred to the application buffer. Three routines are used:
DaqAdcTransferSetBuffer Configure a buffer for A/D transfer. Allows configuration of the buffer for block and single reading
update modes as well as linear and circular buffer definitions.
DaqAdcTransferStart
Start a transfer from the Personal Daq device to the buffer specified in thedaqAdcTransferSetBuffer command
DaqAdcTransferStop
Stop a transfer from the Personal Daq device to the buffer specified in thedaqAdcTransferSetBuffer commandTo find out whether a background A/D transfer is complete or to stop transfers, use the following function:
DaqAdcTransferGetStat
Return current A/D transfer status as well as a count representing the total number of transferredscans or the number of scans available.

Digital Functions( Does not apply to Personal Daq/54 )After the digital group is configured, the ports can be read or written a byte at a time. Note that “low/high” and “digital I/O” areaccessed a nibble at a time. A single bit of a digital channel can be read or written using the following routines:
daqIOReadBit
Return indicated bit from selected channel.
daqIOWriteBit
Send indicated bit to selected channel.

A-14

API Custom Program Modules

Appendix A, 878495

Personal Daq User’s Manual

API Commands

B

Overview
This appendix includes information regarding type-sensitive API function wrappers for Visual Basic,
Personal Daq driver commands for WindowsTM in 32-bit mode, parameter definitions such as A/Dchannels, event-handling, hardware, A/D gain, general I/O, digital I/O port connection (page B-29), andAPI error codes (page B-33).
Type-Sensitive API Function Wrappers for Visual Basic
Each API function has a wrapper serving as an interface between the Visual Basic program and the actual
API function calls. API function prototypes (made available by PDAQX.DLL) are declared in the header
file (PDAQX.BAS) as follows:
Declare Function BdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer& Lib "pdaqx.dll" Alias _"daqAdcTransferSetBuffer" (ByVal handle&, buf As Any, ByVal ScanCount&, _ByVal transferMask&)

Ideally, any application written in Visual Basic should call the function above by using the function
wrapper, VbdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer, rather than calling the API function directly via
BdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer. The standard wrapper for this function is:
Function VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer&(ByVal handle&, buf%(), ByVal ScanCount&,
ByVal transferMask&)
Dim lb1&
lb1& = LBound(buf%)
daqErrno& = BdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer&(handle&, buf%(lb1&), ScanCount&,transferMask&)
If ((daqErrno& <> 0) And (daqErrnum& <> 0)) Then Error daqErrnum&
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer& = daqErrno&
End Function

For Visual Basic versions preceding 5.0, proper error handling is made possible with the use of wrappers.
In cases where API functions return structured information, the function wrappers assist in presenting that
information to the programmer. For VBdaqGetDeviceList the information in the byte array (returned by
the DLL) is transferred to a standard VB string array that is easier to work with on the programming end.
It is important to note that while every API function supported in Visual Basic has at least one associatedwrapper, the API functions that include buffer references have two different associated wrappers(dependent on the buffer’s data type). For example, consider the daqAdcTransferSetBuffer function.
The prototype has a buffer parameter declared as type Any (see previous wrapper code). Data acquisitionbuffers can contain either integers (16-bit numbers), or single-precision floating-point numbers (Single
data type).
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer - would be used to call the daqAdcTransferSetBuffer function with abuffer containing integers.
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle - would be used for a buffer containing single-precision

floating-point numbers.
The only difference between the VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer and VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle
functions is that the buf parameters consist of different data types for each wrapper.
The following table lists buffer-related API functions and associated wrappers.
API Function
BdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer
BdaqAdcTransferBufData
BdaqAdcRdScan
BdaqAdcRdN
BdaqAdcRdScanN
BdaqAdcGetBufData
BdaqAdcRd
BdaqCvtRawDataFormat

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Integer Wrapper
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer
VBdaqAdcTransferBufData
VBdaqAdcRdScan
VBdaqAdcRdN
VBdaqAdcRdScanN
VBdaqAdcGetBufData
VBdaqAdcRd
VBdaqCvtRawDataFormat

Appendix B, 887095

Floating-Point Wrapper
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle
VBdaqAdcTransferBufDataSingle
VBdaqAdcRdScanSingle
VBdaqAdcRdNSingle
VBdaqAdcRdScanNSingle
VBdaqAdcGetBufDataSingle
VBdaqAdcRdSingle
VBdaqCvtRawDataFormatSingle

API Commands

B-1

Prototype Commands, Listed by Function Type (as defined in driver header files)
Function

Description

Page

Device Initialization Prototypes
daqOpendaqOpenList
daqClose
daqCloseList
daqOnline
daqGetDeviceCount
daqGetDeviceList
daqGetDeviceProperties

Open a session with the Personal Daq
Open, initialize, and prepare devices (specified by the deviceList parameter)
End communication with the Personal Daq
Close devices opened by daqOpenList
Check online status of the Personal Daq
Return the number of currently configured devices
Return the list of currently configured devices
Return the properties of specified device

B-25
B-25
B-18
B-19
B-24
B-21
B-21
B-21

Error Handler Function Prototypes
daqSetDefaultErrorHandler
daqSetErrorHandler
daqProcessError
daqGetLastError
daqDefaultErrorHandler
daqFormatError

Set the default error handler
Specify a user defined routine to call when an error occurs in any command
Process a driver defined error condition
Return the last logged error condition
Call the default error handler
Return text string for specified error

B-26
B-26
B-26
B-22
B-20
B-20

Event Handling Function Prototypes
daqSetTimeout
daqWaitForEvent
daqWaitForEvents

Set the time-out value for the Personal Daq operation
Wait for specified Personal Daq device event
Wait for multiple specified Personal Daq device events

B-27
B-28
B-28

Return the software version

B-22

Utility Function Prototypes
daqGetDriverVersion

Expansion Configuration Prototypes
daqSetOption

Set options for a device’s channel/signal path configuration

B-27

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Scan Sequence
daqAdcSetMux
daqAdcSetScan
daqAdcGetScan

Configure a scan specifying start and end channels
Configure up to 256 channels making up an A/D or HS digital input scan
Read the current scan configuration

B-12
B-13
B-4

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Trigger
daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced

Configure an A/D trigger with multiple trigger-event conditions

B-14

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Scan Rate and Source
daqAdcSetRate
daqAdcSetFreq
daqAdcGetFreq

Configure the ADC scan rate with the mode parameter
Configure the pacer clock frequency in Hz
Read the current pacer clock frequency

B-12
B-11
B-4

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Scan Count, Rate and Source
daqAdcSetAcq

Set acquisition configuration information

B-9

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Direct-to-Disk
daqAdcSetDiskFile

Specify the disk file for direct-to-disk transfers

B-10

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Acquisition Control
daqAdcArm
daqAdcDisarm

Arm an acquisition
Disarm an acquisition

B-3
B-4

Custom ADC Acquisition Prototypes - Data Transfer without Buffer Allocation
daqAdcAcqGetStat
daqAdcTransferBufData
daqAdcTransferSetBuffer
daqAdcTransferStart
daqAdcTransferGetStat
daqAdcTransferStop

Returns current state of acquisition
Transfer scans from driver-allocated buffer to user-specified buffer
Setup a destination buffer for an ADC transfer
Start an ADC transfer
Retrieve status of an ADC transfer
Stop an ADC transfer

B-3
B-15
B-17
B-18
B-16
B-18

One-Step ADC Acquisition Prototypes
daqAdcRd
daqAdcRdScan
daqAdcRdN
daqAdcRdScanN

Configure an A/D acquisition and read one sample from a channel
Configure an A/D acquisition and read one scan
Configure an A/D acquisition and read multiple scans from a channel
Configure an A/D acquisition and read multiple scans

B-5
B-7
B-6
B-8

Data Format and Conversion Prototypes
daqAdcSetDataFormat
daqAdcSetFilter
daqCvtRawDataFormat
daqCvtSetAdcRange

Set the raw and post-acquisition data formats
Sets the driver to perform filtering of analog channels
Convert raw data to a specified format
Set the ADC Voltage Range for the conversion routines

B-10
B-11
B-19
B-20

General I/O Prototypes - Read/Write
daqIOReadBit
daqIORead
daqIOWriteBit
daqIOWrite

B-2

API Commands

Read a DIO bit (channel)
Read a DIO byte (8 channels)
Write a DIO bit (channel)
Write a DIO byte (8 channels)

Appendix B, 887095

B-23
B-22
B-24
B-23

Personal Daq User’s ManualCommands in Alphabetical Order
The following pages give the details for each API command. Listed in alphabetical order, each section
starts with a table that summarizes the main features of the command (C, Visual BASIC, and Delphi
language prototypes and their related parameters). An explanation follows with related information and insome cases a programming example.
Note:

Commands, parameters, values, and code all use a bold mono-spaced Courier font todistinguish characters and avoid ambiguity.

daqAdcAcqGetStat
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

daqAdcAcqGetStat(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD active, PDWORD preTrigCount, PDWORD
postTrigCount, PDWORD totalAvail, PDWORD bufCycles, DWORD bufPosition);
daqAdcAcqGetStat(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD active, PDWORD preTrigCount, PDWORD
postTrigCount, PDWORD totalAvail, PDWORD bufCycles, DWORD bufPosition);
VBdaqAdcAcqGetStat&(ByVal handle&, ByRef active&, ByRef preTrigCount&, ByRef
postTrigCount&, ByRef totalAvail&, ByRef bufCycles&, ByRef bufPosition&)
daqAdcAcqGetStat(handle:DaqHandleT; var active:DWORD; var preTrigCount:DWORD; var
postTrigCount:DWORD; var totalAvail:DWORD; var bufCycles:DWORD; var
bufPosition:DWORD)
handleHandle of device from which to obtain status.
activeIndicates the current state of the acquisition.
preTrigCount
Indicates the number of pre-trigger scans acquired.
postTrigCount
Indicates the number of post-trigger scans acquired.
totalAvail
Indicates the total number of available scans.
bufCycles
Indicates the number of buffer cycles processed.
BufPosition
Indicates the buffer position.
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTransferGetStat
None
All devices

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description
daqAdcAcqGetStat allows you to retrieve the current state of the acquisition in terms of the number of pre-trigger and post-trigger scansacquired, the total amount of acquired scans available for transfer, the number of buffer processing cycles that have occurred, and thecurrent position in the acquisition buffer.
The active parameter will indicate the current state of the acquisition in the form of a bit mask. Refer to the ADC Acquisition/Transfer Active
Flag Definitions (in the ADC Miscellaneous Definitions table) for valid bit-mask states.
The preTrigCount and postTrigCount parameters return the total number of pre-trigger and post-trigger scans acquired respectively.
The totalAvail and bufCycles parameters indicate the number of available scans and the number of buffer processing cycles thathave occurred. The bufPosition parameter indicates the current position in the transfer buffer.

daqAdcArm
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcArm(DaqHandleT handle);
daqAdcArm(DaqHandleT handle);
VBdaqAdcArm&(ByVal handle&)
daqAdcArm(handle:DaqHandleT)
handle Handle to the device to which configured ADC acquisition is to be armed
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcDisarm
ADCEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqAdcArm allows you to arm an ADC acquisition by enabling the currently defined ADC configuration. ADC acquisition will occur when
the trigger event (as specified by daqAdcSetTrig) is satisfied. All ADC acquisition configuration information must be specified prior to thedaqAdcArm command. For a previously configured acquisition, the daqAdcArm command will use the specified parameters. If noprevious configuration was given, or it is desirable to change any or all acquisition parameters, then those commands relating to the desired
ADC acquisition configuration must be issued prior to calling daqAdcArm. Personal Daq will perform calibration upon execution of thedaqAdcArm command.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-3

daqAdcDisarm
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcDisarm(DaqHandleT handle);
daqAdcDisarm(DaqHandleT handle);
VBdaqAdcDisarm&(ByVal handle&)
daqAdcDisarm(handle:DaqHandleT)
handlehandle to the device to disable ADC acquisitions
DerrNoError - No error
daqAdcArm
None
All devices

daqAdcDisarm allows you to disarm an acquisition if one is currently active.
•

If the specified trigger event has not yet occurred, the trigger event will be disabled and no acquisition will be performed.

•

If the trigger event has occurred, both the acquisition and the transfer of data come to a halt.

daqAdcGetFreq
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcGetFreq(DaqHandleT handle, PFLOAT freq);
daqAdcGetFreq(DaqHandleT handle, PFLOAT freq);
VbdaqAdcGetFreq&(ByVal handle&, freq!)
daqAdcGetFreq(handle:DaqHandleT; var freq:single)
handle Handle to the device for which to get the current frequency setting
freq
A variable to hold the currently defined sampling frequency in Hz
Valid values: 100000.0 - 0.0002
DerrNoError - No errors
daqAdcSetFreq, daqAdcSetClockNone
All devices

daqAdcGetFreq reads the sampling frequency of the pacer clock.

daqAdcGetScan
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcGetScan(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD channels, daqAdcGain *gains, PDWORD flags,
PDWORD chanCount);
daqAdcGetScan(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD channels, DaqAdcGain *gains, PDWORD flags,
PDWORD chanCount);
VbdaqAdcGetScan&(ByVal handle&, channels&(), gains&(), flags&(), chanCount&)
daqAdcGetScan( handle:DaqHandleT; channels:PDWORD; gains:daqAdcGainP; flags:PDWORD;
chanCount:PDWORD )handleHandle to the device for which to get the current scan configuration.
channels
An array to hold up to 512 channel numbers or 0 if the channel information is not desired.
*gainsAn array to hold up to 512 gain values or 0 if the channel gain information is not desired
flags
Channel configuration flags in the in the form of a bit mask
chanCount
A variable to hold the number of values returned in the chans and gains arrays
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcSetScan, daqAdcSetMux
None
All devices

daqAdcGetScan reads the current scan group consisting of all channels currently configured. The returned parameter settings directly
correspond to those set using the daqAdcSetScan function. For further description of these parameters, refer to daqAdcSetScan. See
ADC Flags Definition table for channel flag definitions.

B-4

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcRd
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns

See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcRd(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD chan, PVOID sample, daqAdcGain gain,
DWORD flags);
daqAdcRd(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD chan, PVOID sample, DaqAdcGain gain,
DWORD flags);
VBdaqAdcRdSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal chan&, sample!, ByVal gain&, ByVal flags&)
daqAdcRd(handle:DaqHandleT; chan:DWORD; sample:pointer; const gain:daqAdcGain;flags:DWORD)
handleHandle to the device for which the ADC reading is to be acquiredchan
A single channel number
sampleA pointer to a value where an A/D sample is stored. Valid values: (See daqAdcSetTag)gain
The channel gain
flags
Channel configuration flags in the form of a bit mask
DerrFIFOFull
Buffer Overrun
DerrInvGain
Invalid gain
DerrInvChan
Invalid channel
DerrNoError
No ErrordaqAdcSetMux, daqAdcSetTrig, daqAdcSoftTrig
None
All devices

daqAdcRd is used to take a single reading from the given local A/D channel. This function will use a software trigger to immediately
trigger and acquire one sample from the specified A/D channel.
•

The chan parameter indicates the channel for which to take the sample.

•

The sample parameter is a pointer to where the collected sample should be stored.

•

The gain parameter indicates the channel’s gain setting.

•

The flags parameter allows the setting of channel-dependent options. See ADC Flags Definition table for channel flags
definitions.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-5

daqAdcRdN
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns

See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcRdN(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD chan, PVOID buf, DWORD scanCount,
daqAdcTriggerSource triggerSource, BOOL rising, FLOAT level, FLOAT freq,
daqAdcGain gain, DWORD flags);
daqAdcRdN(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD chan, PVOID buf, DWORD scanCount,
DaqAdcTriggerSource triggerSource, BOOL rising, FLOAT level, FLOAT freq,
DaqAdcGain gain, DWORD flags);
VBdaqAdcRdNSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal chan&, buf!(), ByVal ScanCount&, ByVal
triggerSource&, ByVal rising&, ByVal level!, ByVal Freq!, ByVal gain&, ByVal
flags&)”
daqAdcRdN(handle:DaqHandleT; chan:DWORD; buf:pointer; scanCount:DWORD;
triggerSource:daqAdcTriggerSource; rising:longbool; level:single; freq:single;
const gain:daqAdcGain; flags:DWORD)
HandleHandle to the device for which the ADC channel samples are to be acquired
Chan
A single channel number
Buf
An array where the A/D scans will be returned
ScanCount
The number of scans to be taken; Valid values: 1 - 32767
TriggerSource
The trigger source
RisingBoolean flag to indicate the rising or falling edge for the trigger source
Level
The trigger level if an analog trigger is specified; Valid values: 0 -4095
Freq
The sampling frequency in Hz (100000.0 to 0.0002)
Gain
The channel gain
Flags
Channel configuration flags in the form of a bit mask
DerrFIFOFull
Buffer overrun
DerrInvGain
Invalid gain
DerrIncChan
Invalid channel
DerrInvTrigSource
Invalid trigger
DerrInvLevel
Invalid level
daqAdcSetFreq, daqAdcSetMux, daqAdcSetClock, daqAdcSetTrig
None
All devices

daqAdcRdN is used to take multiple scans from a single A/D channel. This function will:B-6•

Configure the pacer clock•

Configure all channels with the specified gain parameter•

Configure all channel options with the channel flags specified•

Arm the trigger•

Acquire count scans from the specified A/D channel•

See ADC Flags Definition table (in ADC Miscellaneous Definitions) for channel flags parameter definition.

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcRdScan
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcRdScan(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD startChan, DWORD endChan, PVOID buf,
daqAdcGain gain, DWORD flags);
daqAdcRdScan(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD startChan, DWORD endChan, PVOID buf,
DaqAdcGain gain, DWORD flags);
VBdaqAdcRdScanSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal startChan&, ByVal endChan&, buf!(), ByVal
gain&, ByVal flags&)
daqAdcRdScan(handle:DaqHandleT; startChan:DWORD; endChan:DWORD; buf:pointer;
const gain:daqAdcGain; flags:DWORD);
HandleHandle to the device from which the ADC scan is to be acquired
StartChan
The starting channel of the scan group
EndChan
The ending channel of the scan group
Buf
An array where the A/D scans will be placed
Gain
The channel gain
Flags
Channel configuration flags in the form of a bit mask.
DerrInvGain
Invalid gain
DerrInvChan
Invalid channel
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcRdScanN, daqAdcSetMux, daqAdcSetClock, daqAdcSetTrig
None
All devices

daqAdcRdScan reads a single sample from multiple channels. This function will use a software trigger to immediately trigger and acquire
one scan consisting of each channel, starting with startChan and ending with endChan. The gain setting will be applied to all channels.
See ADC Flags Definition table for channel flags definitions.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-7

daqAdcRdScanNDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC

DelphiParameters

Returns

See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcRdScanN(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD startChan, DWORD endChan, PVOID buf,
DWORD scanCount, daqAdcTriggerSource triggerSource, BOOL rising, FLOAT level, FLOAT
freq, daqAdcGain gain, DWORD flags);
daqAdcRdScanN(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD startChan, DWORD endChan, PVOID buf,
DWORD scanCount, DaqAdcTriggerSource triggerSource, BOOL rising, FLOAT level, FLOAT
freq, DaqAdcGain gain, DWORD flags);
VBdaqAdcRdScanNSingle&(ByVal handle&, ByVal startChan&, ByVal endChan&, buf!(),
ByVal ScanCount&, ByVal triggerSource&, ByVal rising&, ByVal level!, ByVal Freq!,
ByVal gain&, ByVal flags&)
daqAdcRdScanN(handle:DaqHandleT; startChan:DWORD; endChan:DWORD; buf:pointer;
scanCount:DWORD; triggerSource:daqAdcTriggerSource; rising:longbool; level:single;
freq:single; const gain:daqAdcGain; flags:DWORD)
handleHandle to the device from which ADC scans are to be acquired
startchan
The starting channel of the scan group (see table at end of appendix)
endchan
The ending channel of the scan group (see table at end of appendix)
buf
An array where the A/D scans will be placed
scanCount
The number of scans to be read ; Valid values: 1 - 65536
triggerSource
The trigger source (see table at end of appendix)
risingBoolean flag to indicate the rising or falling edge for the trigger sourcelevel
The trigger level if an analog trigger is specified; Valid values: 0 -4095
freq
The sampling frequency in Hz; Valid values: 100000.0 - 0.0002
gain
The channel gain (See tables at end of appendix).
flags
Channel configuration flags in the form of a bit mask.
DerrInvGain
Invalid gain
DerrInvChan
Invalid channel
DerrInvTrigSource
Invalid trigger
DerrInvLevel
Invalid Level
DerrFIFOFull
Buffer Overrun
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcRd, daqAdcRdN, daqAdcRdScan, daqAdcSetClock, daqAdcSetTrig
None
All devices

daqAdcRdScanN reads multiple scans from multiple A/D channels. This function will configure the pacer clock, arm the trigger and acquire
count scans consisting of each channel, starting with startChan and ending with endChan. The gain setting will be applied to allchannels. The freq parameter is used to set the acquisition frequency. See ADC Flags Definition table for channel flags parameter
definition.

B-8

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcSetAcq
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

daqAdcSetAcq(DaqHandleT handle, daqAdcAcqMode mode, DWORD preTrigCount, DWORD
postTrigCount);
daqAdcSetAcq(DaqHandleT handle, DaqAdcAcqMode mode, DWORD preTrigCount, DWORD
postTrigCount);
VBdaqAdcSetAcq&(ByVal handle&, ByVal mode&, ByVal preTrigCount&, ByVal
postTrigCount&)
daqAdcSetAcq(handle:DaqHandleT; mode:daqAdcAcqMode; preTrigCount:DWORD;
postTrigCount:DWORD)
handleHandle to the device for which the ADC acquisition is to be configured
mode
Selects the mode of the acquisition
PreTrigCount
Number of pre-trigger ADC scans to be collected
PostTrigCount
Number of post-trigger ADC scans to be collected
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcArm, daqAdcDisarm, daqAdcSetTrig
ADCEX1.C, DACEX1.C, DYN32ENH.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), ADCEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description
daqAdcSetAcq allows you to characterize the acquisition mode and the pre- and post-trigger durations. The mode parameter describes
the style of data collection. The preTrigCount and postTrigCount parameters specify the respective durations, or lengths, of the
pre-trigger and post-trigger acquisition states.
Acquisition modes can be defined as follows:•

DaamNShot - Once triggered, continue acquisition until the specified post-trigger count has been satisfied. Once the post-trigger
count has been satisfied, the acquisition will be automatically disarmed.

•

DaamInfinitePost - Once triggered, continue the acquisition indefinitely until the acquisition is disabled by the daqAdcDisarmfunction.

•

DaamPrePost - Begin collecting the specified number of pre-trigger scans immediately upon issuance of the daqAdcArm function.
The trigger will not be enabled until the specified number of pre-trigger scans have been collected. Once triggered, the acquisition
will then continue collecting post-trigger data until the post-trigger count has been satisfied. Once the post-trigger count has beensatisfied, the acquisition will be automatically disarmed.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-9

daqAdcSetDataFormat
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetDataFormat(DaqHandleT handle, daqAdcRawDataFormatT rawFormat,
daqAdcPostProcDataFormatT postProcFormat);daqAdcSetDataFormat(DaqHandleT handle, DaqAdcRawDataFormatT rawFormat,
DaqAdcPostProcDataFormatT postProcFormat);
VBdaqAdcSetDataFormat&(ByVal handle&, ByVal rawFormat&, ByVal postProcFormat&)daqAdcSetDataFormat(Handle:DaqHandleT; rawFormat:daqAdcRawDataFormatT rawFormat;
postProcFormat:daqAdcPostProcDataFormatT);
HandleThe handle to the device for which to set the option
RawFormat
Specifies the raw data format
PostProcFormat
Flags specifying the options to use
DerrNoError
No errordaqCvtRawDataFormat,daqCvtRawDataFormat
None
All devices

daqAdcSetDataFormat allows the setting of the raw and the post-acquisition data formats which will be returned by the acquisitiontransfer functions.
Note: Certain devices may be limited to the types of raw and post-acquisition data formats that can be presented.
The rawFormat parameter indicates how the raw data format is to be presented. Normally, the raw-data format represents the data fromthe A/D converter. The default value for this parameter is DardfNative where the raw-data format follows the native-data format of theA/D for the particular device.
The Personal Daq requires that the rawFormat parameter be set to DardfFloat. This format indicates that the driver should return theraw data in floating point format. In this case the floating point data returned will be indicative of the type of channel configured. For
instance, if the channel is configured as a volts/mvolts/uvolts channel then the floating point value returned for the channel will be in volts.
If the channel is configured as temperature (thermocouple) then the floating point value returned for that channels will be in degrees C.
The postProcFormat parameter specifies the format for which post-acquisition data will be presented. This format is used by the onestep functions of the form daqAdcRd…. The default value is DappdfRaw where the post-acquisition data format will follow the rawFormat
parameter.

daqAdcSetDiskFile
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetDiskFile(DaqHandleT handle, LPSTR filename, daqAdcOpenMode openMode,
DWORD preWrite);
daqAdcSetDiskFile(DaqHandleT handle, LPSTR filename, DaqAdcOpenMode openMode,
DWORD preWrite);
VBdaqAdcSetDiskFile&(ByVal handle&, ByVal filename$, ByVal openMode&, ByVal
preWrite&)
daqAdcSetDiskFile(handle:DaqHandleT; filename:PChar; openMode:daqAdcOpenMode;
preWrite:DWORD)
handleHandle to the device for which direct to disk ADC acquisition is to be performed.
filename
String representing the path and name of the file to place the raw ADC acquisition data.
openMode
Specifies how to open the file for writing
preWrite
Specifies the number of bytes to pre-write in the file
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTransferGetStat, daqAdcTransferSetBuffer, daqAdcTransferStart,
daqAdcTransferStop
None
All devices

daqAdcSetDiskFile allows you to set a destination file for data transfers. Data transfers will be directed to the specified disk file. The
filename parameter is a string representing the path\name of the file to be opened. The openMode parameter indicates how the file is tobe opened for writing data. Valid file open modes are defined as follows:•

DaomAppendFile - Open an existing file to append subsequent data transfers. This mode should only be used when the existing
file has a similar channel scan group configuration as the subsequent transfers.

•

DaomWriteFile - Rewrite or write over an existing file. This operation will destroy the original contents of the file.

•

DaomCreateFile- Create a new file for subsequent data transfers. This mode does not require that the file exist beforehand.

The preWrite parameter may, optionally, be used to specify the amount that the file is to be pre-written before the actual data collection
begins. Specifying the pre-write amount may increase the data-to-disk performance of the acquisition if it is known beforehand how muchdata will be collected. If no pre-write is to be done, then the preWrite parameter should be set to 0.

B-10

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcSetFilter
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

daqAdcSetFilter(DaqHandleT handle, DaqAdcFilterType filterType, DWORD
filterWindow);
daqAdcSetFilter(DaqHandleT handle, DaqAdcFilterType filterType, DWORD
filterWindow);
VbdaqAdcSetFilter&(ByVal handle&, ByVal filterType&, ByVal filterWindow&)
DaqAdcGetScan( handle:DaqHandleT; filterType:DaqAdcFilterType;filterWindow:DWORD)
handleHandle to the device for which to get the current scan configuration.
filterType
Specifies the type of analog filtering to be performed (currently DaftSWAvg)
filterWindow
Specifies the number of scans over which to filter
DerrNoError - No error(also, refer to API Error Codes on page page B-33)

Returns
See Also
Program References None
PersonalDaq
Used With
Description
daqAdcSetFilter sets the driver to perform filtering for analog channels. The filterType parameter specifies the filter method to
be used. Once this function is set, filtering will be performed on all analog channels in the scan group. Note that the filterWindow
parameter specifies the number of scans over which the filtering method is to be applied.

daqAdcSetFreq
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetFreq(DaqHandleT handle, FLOAT freq);
daqAdcSetFreq(DaqHandleT handle, FLOAT freq);
VBdaqAdcSetFreq&(ByVal handle&, ByVal freq!)
daqAdcSetFreq(handle:DaqHandleT; freq:single)
HandleHandle to the device for which the ADC acquisition frequency is to be set.
Freq
The sampling frequency in Hz; Valid values: 100000.0 - 0.0002
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcGetFreq, daqAdcSetRate
None
All devices

daqAdcSetFreq calculates and sets the frequency of the acquisition clock using the frequency specified in Hz. The frequency specified is
the rate at which channel scans are collected. This rate represents the interval at which each channel scan group is collected. The rate
specified must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for which the currently defined channel scan configuration can run. The
maximum rate can be retrieved via the daqAdcGetFreq or daqAdcSetRate commands. If a rate is specified which is greater than the
maximum frequency at which the current channel configuration will allow the driver will automatically set the rate to the maximum allowable.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-11

daqAdcSetMux
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetMux(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD startChan, DWORD endChan, daqAdcGain gain,
DWORD flags);
daqAdcSetMux(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD startChan, DWORD endChan, DaqAdcGain gain,
DWORD flags);
VbdaqAdcSetMux&(ByVal handle&, ByVal startChan&, ByVal endChan&, ByVal gain&, ByVal
flags&)
daqAdcSetMux(handle:DaqHandleT; startChan:DWORD; endChan:DWORD; const
gain:daqAdcGain; flags:DWORD)
HandleHandle to the device for which to configure the ADC channel scan group
StartChan The starting channel of the scan group
EndChan
The ending channel of the scan group
Gain
The gain value for all channels
Flags
Channel configuration flags in the form of a bit mask
DerrInvGain
Invalid gain
DerrIncChan
Invalid channel
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcSetScan, daqAdcGetScan
None
All devices

daqAdcSetMux sets a simple scan sequence of local A/D channels from startChan to endChan with the specified gain value. This
command provides a simple alternative to daqAdcSetScan if only consecutive channels need to be acquired. The flags parameter isused to set channel dependent options. See ADC Flags Definition table for channel flags definitions.

daqAdcSetRate
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetRate(DaqHandleT handle, daqAdcRateMode mode, daqAdcAcqState acqState, FLOAT
reqRate, PFLOAT actualRate);
daqAdcSetRate(DaqHandleT handle, DaqAdcRateMode mode, DaqAdcAcqState acqState, FLOAT
reqRate, PFLOAT actualRate);
VBdaqAdcSetRate(ByVal handle&, ByVal mode&, ByVal acqState&, ByVal reqRate!,
actualRate!);daqAdcSetRate(handle:DaqHandleT; mode:daqAdcRateMode; state:daqAdcAcqState;
reqValue:single; actualValue:PSINGLE);
handleHandle to the device for which to set ADC scanning frequency.
mode
Specifies the rate mode (frequency or period).
acqState
Specifies the acquisition state to which the rate is to be applied.
reqRateSpecifies the requested rate.
actualRate
Returns the actual rate applied. This may be different from the requested rate.
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcSetAcq, daqAdcSetTrig, daqAdcArm, daqAdcSetFreq, daqAdcGetFreq
DAQEX.PAS (Delphi), ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB)
All devices

daqAdcSetRate configures the scan rate using the rate mode specified by the mode parameter. Currently, the valid modes are:•

DarmPeriod - Defines the requested rate to be in periods/sec.

•

DarmFrequency - Defines the requested rate to be a frequency. This function will set the acquisition rate requested by the
reqRate parameter for the acquisition state specified by the acqState parameter.

Currently, the following acquisition states are valid:•

DaasPreTrig - Sets the pre-trigger acquisition rate to the requested rate.

•

DaasPostTrig - Sets the post-trigger acquisition rate to the requested rate.

Personal Daq does not allow a pre-trigger rate different from the post-trigger rate. Therefore, the pre-trigger rate settings will be ignored
and the post-trigger rate will be used for both the pre-trigger and the post-trigger scan rates.
If the requested rate is unattainable on the specified device, a rate will be automatically adjusted to the device’s closest attainable rate. If
this occurs, the actualRate parameter will return the actual rate for which the device has been programmed.

B-12

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcSetScan
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns

See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetScan(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD channels, daqAdcGain *gains, PDWORD flags,
DWORD chanCount);
daqAdcSetScan(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD channels, DaqAdcGain *gains, PDWORD flags,
DWORD chanCount);
VBdaqAdcSetScan&(ByVal handle&, channels&(), gains&(), flags&(), ByVal chanCount&)
daqAdcSetScan(handle:DaqHandleT; channels:PDWORD; gains:daqAdcGainP; flags:PDWORD;
chanCount:DWORD)
HandleHandle to the device for which ADC scan group is to be configured
Channels
An array of up to 512 channel numbers*gainsAn array of up to 512 gain values
Flags
Channel configuration flags in the form of a bit mask
ChanCount
The number of values in the chans and gains arrays Valid values: 1 -512
DerrNotCapable
No high speed digital
DerrInvGain
Invalid gain
DerrInvChan
Invalid channel
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcGetScan, daqAdcSetMux
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqAdcSetScan configures a scan group consisting of multiple channels. As many as 8192 channel entries can be made in the scan groupconfiguration. Any analog, frequency, counter or digital input channel can be included in the scan group configuration at any valid gain
setting. Scan group configuration may be composed of local or expansion module channels.
The channels parameter is a pointer to an array of up to 8192 channel/device values. Each entry represents a channel/device number inthe scan group configuration. Channel/device combinations can be entered multiple times at the same or different gain setting.
The gains parameter is a pointer to an array of up to 8192 gain settings. Each gain entry represents the gain to be used with thecorresponding analog channel entry. Gain entry can be any valid gain setting for the corresponding channel.
The flags parameter is a pointer to an array of up to 8192 channel flag settings. Each flag entry represents a 4-byte-wide bit map ofchannel configuration settings for the corresponding channel entry. The channel flags can be used to set channel specific configuration
settings. See the Channel Configuration Flags Definition table for valid channel flag values.
The chanCount parameter represents the total number of channels in the scan group configuration. This number also represents thenumber of entries in each of the channels, gains and flags arrays.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-13

daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced
DLL Function

C

Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced(DaqHandleT handle, daqAdcTriggerSource *trigSources,
daqAdcGain *gains, daqAdcRangeT *adcRanges, daqEnhTrigSensT *trigSensitivity, PFLOAT
level, PFLOAT hysteresis, PDWORD channels, DWORD chanCount,char *opStr);
daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced(DaqHandleT handle, DaqAdcTriggerSource *trigSources,
DaqAdcGain *gains, DaqAdcRangeT *adcRanges, DaqEnhTrigSensT *trigSensitivity, PFLOAT
level, PFLOAT hysteresis, PDWORD channels, DWORD chanCount,char *opStr);
VBdaqAdcSetTrigEnhanced&(ByVal handle&, ByRef triggerSources&(), ByRef gains&(),
ByRef adcRanges&(), ByRef trigSense&(), ByRef levels!(), ByRef hysteresis!(),
ByRef chan&(), ChanCount&, opstr$)
daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced(handle:DaqHandleT; trigSource:daqAdcTriggerSourceP;
gains:daqAdcGainP; adcRanges:daqAdcRangeTP; trigSensitivity:daqEnhTrigSensTP;
level:PSINGLE; hysteresis:PSINGLE; channel:PDWORD; chanCount:DWORD; opStr:PCHAR)
handleHandle to the device for which the ADC acquisition trigger is to be configured.
triggerSource
A pointer to an array of trigger sources for each defined trigger channel.
gains
A pointer to an array of gains for each defined A/D trigger channel.
levels
A pointer to an array of A/D analog trigger levels for each defined A/D trigger channel.
hysteresis
A pointer to an array of hysteresis values for each defined A/D trigger channel.
trigSense
A pointer to an array of trigger sensitivity flags for each defined A/D channel trigger source.
adcRanges
A pointer to an array of polarity flag definitions for each defined A/D channel.
channels
A pointer to an array of trigger channels representing the actual A/D trigger channels totrigger on.
chanCount
Indicates the number of configured A/D channels.
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcSetAcq, daqAdcSetTrig, daqAdcSetScan
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
Personal Daq/55 and Personal Daq/56

daqAdcSetTrigEnhanced configures the device for triggering. Trigger configuration allows the device to be configured to detect A/D
triggering formed with multiple A/D channel trigger-event conditions. The trigger event may be defined as a combination of multiple A/D
analog-level event conditions that are logically and’d or or’d.
The trigger event is formulated based on the channel trigger event for each channel in the trigger sequence. The total number of trigger
channels is defined by the chanCount parameter. Each channel trigger configuration parameter definition is a pointer to an array ofchanCount length and is defined as follows:•

channels - Defines a pointer to an array of actual device/channel numbers for which to configure the corresponding trigger events.

•

triggerSources - Defines a pointer to an array of trigger sources for which to configure the corresponding trigger events for thecorresponding channel in the channels array. See the ADC Trigger Source Definitions table for valid triggers.

•

gains - Defines a pointer to an array of gains corresponding to the actual A/D channels in the corresponding A/D channel numberin the channels array.

•adcRanges - Defines a pointer to an array of A/D ranges for the A/D channels defined in the corresponding channels array.
Note: Personal Daq ignores adcRanges parameters.

•

hysteresis - Defines a pointer to an array of hysteresis values for each corresponding A/D channel defined in the channels array.

•levels - Defines a pointer to an array of levels for which, when satisfied, will set the trigger event for the corresponding channel
defined in the channels array.

•

opStr - Defines a string that defines the logical relationship between the individual channel trigger events and the global A/D trigger
condition. Currently, the string can be defined as “*” to perform an and operation or “+” to perform an or operation on the individual
channel trigger events to formulate the global A/D trigger condition.
Note: Personal Daq ignores opStr parameters.

•

B-14

trigSense - Defines an array of trigger sensitivity definitions for satisfying the defined trigger event for the corresponding channel
defined in the channels array. Currently, the valid trigger sensitivity values are as follows:
DetsRisingEdge

Trigger the channel on the rising edge of the signal at the specified level.

DetsFallingEdge

Trigger the channel on the falling edge of the signal at the specified level.

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcSoftTrig
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcSoftTrig(DaqHandleT handle);
daqAdcSoftTrig(DaqHandleT handle);
VBdaqAdcSoftTrig&(ByVal handle&)
daqAdcSoftTrig(handle:DaqHandleT)
Handle Handle to the device to which the ADC software trigger is to be applied
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcSetTrig, daqAdcSetAcq
None
All devices

daqAdcSoftTrig is used to send a software trigger command to the Personal Daq device. This software trigger can be used to initiate ascan or an acquisition from a program after configuring the software trigger as the trigger source. This function may only be used if thetrigger source for the acquisition has been set to DatsSoftware with the daqAdcSetTrig function.

daqAdcTransferBufData
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcTransferBufData(DaqHandleT handle, PVOID buf, DWORD scanCount,
daqAdcBufferXferMask bufMask, PDWORD retCount);
daqAdcTransferBufData(DaqHandleT handle, PVOID buf, DWORD scanCount,
DaqAdcBufferXferMask bufMask, PDWORD retCount);
VBdaqAdcTransferBufDataSingle&(ByVal handle&, buf!(), ByVal ScanCount&, ByValtransferMask&, retCount&)
daqAdcTransferBufData(handle: DaqHandleT; buf:pointer, scanCount:DWORD,
bufMask:DaqAdcBufferXferMask; retCount:DWORD);
handleHandle to the device for which the ADC buffer should be retrieved.
buf
Pointer to an application-supplied buffer to place the buffered data.
scanCount
Number of scans to retrieve from the acquisition buffer.
bufMaskA mask defining operation depending on the current state of the acquisition buffer
retCount
A pointer to the total number of scans returned, if any.
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTransferSetBuffer, daqAdcTransferGetStat
All devices

daqAdcTransferBufData requests a transfer of scanCount scans from the driver-allocated acquisition buffer to the specified usersupplied buffer. The bufMask parameter can be used to specify the conditions for the transfer as follows:•

DabtmWait - Instructs the function to wait until the requested number of scans are available in the driver-allocated acquisitionbuffer. When the requested number of scans are available, the function will return with retCount set to scanCount, the numberof scans requested. Scan data will be returned in the memory referred to by the buf parameter.

•

DabtmNoWait - Instructs the function to return immediately if the specified number of scans are not available when the function iscalled. If the entire amount requested is not available, the function will return with no data and retCount will be set to 0. If therequested number of scans are available in the acquisition buffer, the function will return with retCount set to scanCount, thenumber of scans requested. Scan data will be returned in the memory referred to by the buf parameter.

•

DabtmRetAvail - Instructs the function to return immediately, regardless of the number of scans available in the driver-allocatedacquisition buffer. The retCount parameter will return the total number of scans retrieved. retCount can return anything from 0
to scanCount, the number of scans requested. Scan data will be returned in the memory referred to by the buf parameter.
The driver-allocated acquisition buffer must have been allocated prior to calling this function. This is performed via thedaqAdcTransferSetBuffer. Refer to daqAdcTransferSetBuffer for more details on specifying the driver-allocatedacquisition buffer.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-15

daqAdcTransferGetStat
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcTransferGetStat(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD active, PDWORD retCount);
daqAdcTransferGetStat(DaqHandleT handle, PDWORD active, PDWORD retCount);
VBdaqAdcTransferGetStat&(ByVal handle&, active&, retCount&)
daqAdcTransferGetStat( handle:DaqHandleT; var active:DWORD; var retCount:DWORD )handleHandle to the device for which ADC transfer status is to be retrieved
activeA pointer to the transfer-state flags in the form of a bit mask
retCount
A pointer to the total number of ADC scans acquired (or available) in the current transfer
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTransferSetBuffer, daqAdcTransferStart, daqAdcTransferStop
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqAdcTransferGetStat allows you to retrieve the current state of an acquisition transfer.
The active parameter will indicate the current state of the transfer in the form of a bit mask. Refer to the ADC Acquisition/Transfer Active
Flag Definitions (in the ADC Miscellaneous Definitions table) for valid bit-mask states.
The retCount parameter will return the total number of scans acquired in the current transfer if the transfer is in user-allocated buffer
mode or will return the total number of unread scans in the acquisition buffer if the transfer is in driver-allocated buffer mode. Refer to thedaqAdcTransferSetBuffer function for more information on buffer allocation modes.
The transfer state and return count values will continue to be updated until any of the following occurs:

B-16

•

the transfer count is satisfied•

the transfer is stopped (daqAdcStopTransfer)•the acquisition is disarmed (daqDisarm)

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqAdcTransferSetBuffer
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcTransferSetBuffer(DaqHandleT handle, PVOID buf, DWORD scanCount,
DWORD transferMask);
daqAdcTransferSetBuffer(DaqHandleT handle, PVOID buf, DWORD scanCount,
DWORD transferMask);
VBdaqAdcTransferSetBufferSingle&(ByVal handle&, buf!(), ByVal ScanCount&, ByValtransferMask&)
daqAdcTransferSetBuffer( handle:DaqHandleT; buf:pointer; scanCount:DWORD;
transferMask:DWORD )handleHandle to the device for which an ADC transfer is to be performed.
buf
Pointer to the buffer for which the acquired data is to be placed.
scanCount
The total length of the buffer (in scans).
transferMask
Configures the buffer transfer mode.
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTransferStart, daqAdcTransferStop, daqAdcTransferGetStat, daqAdcSetAcq,
daqAdcTransferBufData
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqAdcTransferSetBuffer allows you to configure transfer buffers for ADC data acquisition. This function can be used to configure
the specified user- or driver-allocated buffers for subsequent ADC transfers.
If a user-allocated buffer is to be used, two conditions apply:
The buffer specified by the buf parameter must have been allocated by the user prior to calling this function.
The allocated buffer must be large enough to hold the number of ADC scans as determined by the current ADC scan group configuration.
The scanCount parameter is the total length of the transfer buffer in scans. The scan size is determined by the current scan groupconfiguration. Refer to the daqAdcSetScan and daqAdcSetMux functions for further information on scan group configuration.
The character of the transfer can be configured via the transferMask parameter. Among other things, the transferMask specifies the
update, layout/usage, and allocation modes of the buffer. The modes can be set as follows:•

DatmCycleOn - Specifies the buffer to be a circular buffer in buffer-cycle mode; allows the transfer to continue when the end of thetransfer buffer is reached by wrapping the transfer of scan data back to the beginning of the buffer. In this mode, the transfer
buffer will continue to be wrapped until the post-trigger count has been reached (specified by daqAdcSetAcq) or thetransfer/acquisition is halted by the application (daqAdcTransferStop, daqAdcDisarm). The default setting is DatmCycleOff.

•

DatmUpdateSingle - Specifies the update mode as single sample. The update mode can be set to update for every sample orfor every block of data. The update-on-single setting allows the transfer buffer to be updated for each sample collected by the
Personal Daq. The default setting is DatmUpdateSingle.

•

DatmSavePreTrigBuf - Specifies that the driver save the pre-trigger data once the trigger event has been satisfied. This option
allows the driver to save pre-trigger data in a separate linear buffer once the trigger event has occurred. By doing so the pretrigger data buffer can be accessed at any time after the trigger event without having the possibility of the pre-trigger data being
overwritten by new data being written to the driver buffer. When the trigger event occurs the driver writes the specified amount(daqAdcSetMode) of pre-trigger data to an internal pre-trigger buffer which the driver allocates. The pre-trigger data may then beaccessed via the daqAdcTransferBufData function. This option must be used in conjunction with the DatmDriverBuf option.

•

DatmDriverBuf - Specifies that the driver allocate the acquisition buffer as a circular buffer whose length is determined by the
scanCount parameter with current scan group configuration. This option allows the driver to manage the circular acquisition buffer
rather than placing the burden of buffer management on the user. This option should be used with thedaqAdcTransferBufData to access the acquisition buffer. The daqAdcTransferStop or the daqAdcDisarm function willstop the current transfer and de-allocate the driver-supplied ADC acquisition buffer. The default setting is DatmUserBuf. The
DatmUserBuf option specifies a user-allocated acquisition buffer. Here, buffer management must be done in user code. This
option should be used with the daqAdcTransferStart function to perform the data transfer operation.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-17

daqAdcTransferStartDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcTransferStart(DaqHandleT handle);
daqAdcTransferStart(DaqHandleT handle);
VBdaqAdcTransferStart&(ByVal handle&)
daqAdcTransferStart( handle:DaqHandleT )HandleHandle to the device to initiate an ADC transfer
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTranferSetBuffer, daqAdcTransferGetStat, daqAdcTransferStop
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqAdcTransferStart allows you to initiate an acquisition transfer. The transfer will be performed under the current active acquisition.
If no acquisition is currently active, the transfer will not initiate until an acquisition becomes active (via the daqAdcArm function). The
transfer will be characterized by the current settings for the transfer buffer. The transfer buffer can be configured via thedaqAdcSetTransferBuffer function.

daqAdcTransferStop
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqAdcTransferStop(DaqHandleT handle);
daqAdcTransferStop(DaqHandleT handle);
VBdaqAdcTransferStop&(ByVal handle&)
daqAdcTransferStop( handle:DaqHandleT )handle Handle to the device for which the Adc data transfer is to be stopped
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcTransferSetBuffer, daqAdcTransferStart, daqAdcTransferGetStat
None
All devices

daqAdcTransferStop allows you to stop a current buffer transfer, if one is active. The current transfer will be halted and no more data
will transfer into the transfer buffer. Though the transfer is stopped, the acquisition will remain active. Transfers can be re-initiated with
daqAdcStartTransfer after the stop, as long as the current acquisition remains active. The acquisition can be halted by calling thedaqAdcDisarm function.

daqClose
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqClose(DaqHandleT handle);
daqClose(DaqHandleT handle);
VBdaqClose&(ByVal handle&)
daqClose(handle:DaqHandleT)
handle Handle to the device to be closed
DerrNoError
No errordaqOpenADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqClose is used to close a Personal Daq device. Once the specified device has been closed, no subsequent communication with thedevice can be performed. In order to re-establish communications with a closed device, the device must be re-opened with the daqOpenfunction.

B-18

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqCloseList
DLL Function

daqCloseList(DaqHandleT handle);

C

daqCloseList(DaqHandleT handle);

Visual BASIC

VBdaqCloseList&(ByVal handle&)

DelphidaqCloseList(handle:DaqHandleT)

Parameters

handleReturns
See Also

DerrNoError - No error
daqOpenList

Program References

MULTDEV.C

Used With
Description

PersonalDaq55/56

Handle to the open device list to be closed

daqCloseList is used to close a list of PersonalDaq devices opened with the daqOpenList function. After the specified device list has
been closed, no subsequent communication with the devices can be performed. To re-establish communications with any closed devices,
you must open the devices with daqOpen or daqOpenList.

daqCvtRawDataFormat
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqCvtRawDataFormat(PVOID buf, daqAdcCvtAction action, DWORD lastRetCount, DWORD
scanCount, DWORD chanCount);
daqCvtRawDataFormat(PVOID buf, DaqAdcCvtAction action, DWORD lastRetCount, DWORD
scanCount, DWORD chanCount);
VBdaqCvtRawDataFormatSingle&(buf!(), ByVal action&, ByVal lastRetCount&, ByVal
ScanCount&, ByVal ChanCount&)
daqCvtRawDataFormat(buf:PWORD;action:daqAdcCvtAction; lastRetCount:DWORD;
scanCount:DWORD; chanCount: DWORD);
buf
Pointer to the buffer containing the raw data
actionThe type of conversion action to perform on the raw data
lastRetCountThe last retCount returned from daqAdcTransferGetStat
scanCount
The length of the raw data buffer in scans
chanCount
The number of channels per scan in the raw data buffer
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcSetDataFormat
None
All devices

daqCvtRawDataFormat allows the conversion of raw data to a specified format. This function should be called after the raw data has
been acquired. See the transfer data functions (daqAdcTransfer…) for more details on the actual collection of raw data.
The buf parameter specifies the pointer to the data buffer containing the raw data. Prior to calling this function, this user-allocated buffer
should already contain the entire raw data transfer. Upon completion, this data buffer will contain the converted data (the buffer must beable to contain all the converted data).
The DacaRotate can be used to reformat a circular buffer into a linear buffer.
The scanCount parameter specifies the length of the raw buffer in scans. Since the converted data will overwrite the raw data in thebuffer, make sure the specified buffer is large enough, physically, to contain all of the converted data.
The chanCount parameter specifies the number of channels in each scan.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-19

daqCvtSetAdcRange
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqCvtSetAdcRange(FLOAT Admin, FLOAT Admax);
daqCvtSetAdcRange(FLOAT Admin, FLOAT Admax);
VBdaqCvtSetAdcRange&(ByVal ADmin!, ByVal ADmax!)
daqCvtSetAdcRange(Admin:single; Admax:single)
Admin
A/D minimum voltage range
Admax
A/D maximum voltage range
DerrNoError
No errorNone

daqCvtSetAdcRange allows you to set the current ADC range for use by the daqCvt… functions. This function should not need to becalled if used for data collected by the Personal Daq devices.

daqDefaultErrorHandler
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

DaqDefaultErrorHandler(DaqHandleT handle, daqError errCode);
DaqDefaultErrorHandler(DaqHandleT handle, DaqError errCode);
VbdaqDefaultErrorHandler(ByVal handle&, ByVal errCode&)
DaqDefaultErrorHandler(handle:DaqHandleT; errCode:daqError)
HandleHandle to the device to which the default error handler is to be attached.
ErrCodeThe error code number of the detected error
None
DaqGetLastError, daqProcessError, daqSetDefaultErrorHandler
None
All devices

daqDefaultErrorHandler displays an error message and then exits the application program. When the Personadaq library is loaded, it
invokes the default error handler whenever it encounters an error. The error handler may be changed with daqSetErrorHandler.

daqFormatError
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqFormatError(daqError errorNum, PCHAR msg);
daqFormatError(DaqError errorNum, PCHAR msg);
VBdaqFormatError&(ByVal errorNum&, ByVal msg&)
daqFormatError(errorNum:daqerror; msg:PCHAR);
daqError Personal Daq API error code
msg
Pointer to a string to return the error text
DerrNoError
No errordaqSetDefaultErrorHandler, daqSetErrorHandler, daqProcessError, daqGetLastError,
daqDefaultErrorHandler
None
All devices

daqFormatError returns the text-string equivalent for the specified error condition. The error condition is specified by the daqError
parameter. The error text will be returned in the character string pointed to by the msg parameter. The character string space must havebeen previously allocated by the application before calling this function. The allocated character string should be, at minimum, 64 bytes inlength.
For more information on specific error codes refer to the API Error Codes on page page B-33.

B-20

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqGetDeviceCountDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqGetDeviceCount(DWORD *deviceCount);
daqGetDeviceCount(DWORD *deviceCount);
VBdaqGetDevice&(deviceCount&)
daqGetDeviceCount(deviceCount:PDWORD);
deviceCount
Pointer to which the device count is to be returned
DerrNoError
No errordaqGetDeviceList, daqGetDeviceProperties
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqGetDeviceCount returns the number of currently configured devices. This function will return the number of devices currently
configured in the system. The Personal Daq devices need to be present for this function to operate properly.

daqGetDeviceList
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

DaqGetDeviceList(daqDeviceListT *deviceList, DWORD *deviceCount);
DaqGetDeviceList(DaqDeviceListT *deviceList, DWORD *deviceCount);
VbdaqGetDeviceList&(ByRef deviceList() As String, ByRef deviceCount&)
daqGetDeviceList(deviceList:DeviceListTP; devCount:PDWORD);
deviceList
Pointer to memory location to which the device list is to be returned
deviceCount
Number of devices returned in the device list
DerrNoError
No errordaqGetDeviceCount, daqGetDeviceProperties, daqOpen,ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqGetDeviceList returns a list of currently configured devices. This function will return the device names in the deviceList
parameter for the number of devices returned by the deviceCount parameter. Each deviceList entry contains a device nameconsisting of up to 64 characters. The device name can then be used with the daqOpen function to open the specific device.

daqGetDevicePropertiesDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqGetDeviceProperties(LPSTR daqName, daqDevicePropsT *deviceProps);
daqGetDeviceProperties(LPSTR daqName, DaqDevicePropsT *deviceProps);
VBdaqGetDeviceProperties&(ByVal daqName$, deviceProps As daqDevicePropsT)
daqGetDeviceProperties(daqName:string; deviceProps: daqDevicePropsTP);
daqNamePointer to a character string representing the name of the device for which to retrieve
properties
DeviceCount
Number of devices returned in the device list
DerrNoError
No errordaqGetDeviceCount, daqGetDeviceList, daqOpen
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqGetDeviceProperties returns the properties for the specified device as indicated by the daqName parameter. This name should bea valid name of a configured device. The properties for the device are returned in the deviceProps parameter. deviceProps is apointer to user-allocated memory which will hold the device-properties structure. This memory must have been allocated before calling thisfunction.
For detailed device-property structure layout, refer the to daq Device Properties Definition table.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-21

daqGetDriverVersion
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqGetDriverVersion(PDWORD version);
daqGetDriverVersion(PDWORD version);
VBdaqGetDriverVersion&(version&)
daqGetDriverVersion(var version:DWORD)
version Pointer to the version number of the current device driver.
DerrNoError
No error
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqGetDriverVersion allows you to get the revision level of the driver currently in use.

daqGetLastError
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqGetLastError(DaqHandleT handle, daqError *errCode);
daqGetLastError(DaqHandleT handle, DaqError *errCode);
VBdaqGetLastError&(ByVal handle&, errCode&)
daqGetLastError(handle:DaqHandleT; var errCode:daqError);handleHandle to the device*errCode Returned last error code
DerrNoError
No error
daqDefaultErrorHandler, daqProcessError, daqSetDefaultErrorHandler
None
All devices

daqGetLastError allows you to retrieve the last error condition registered by the driver.

daqIORead
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqIORead(DaqHandleT handle, daqIODeviceType devType, daqIODevicePort devPort, DWORD
whichDevice, daqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, PDWORD value);daqIORead(DaqHandleT handle, DaqIODeviceType devType, DaqIODevicePort devPort, DWORD
whichDevice, DaqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, PDWORD value);
VBdaqIORead&(ByVal handle&, ByVal devType&, ByVal devPort&, ByVal whichDevice&,
ByVal whichExpPort&, value&)daqIORead(handle:DaqHandleT; devType:daqIODeviceType; dvPort:daqIODevicePort;
whichDevice:DWORD; whichExpPort:daqIOExpansionPort; var value:DWORD);
handleHandle to the device to perform the IO readdevType
IO Device type
devPort
IO port selection
whichDevice
IO device instance to read fromwhichExpPort
IO device expansion port to read fromvalue
IO value read
DerrNoError
No errordaqIOReadBit, daqIOWrite, daqIOWriteBit
DIGEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices except Personal Daq/54

daqIORead allows you to read the specified port on the selected device. The read operation will return the current state of the port in thevalue parameter. Normally, if the selected port is a byte-wide port, the port state will occupy the low-order byte of the value parameter.
Digital IO channels for the port correspond to each bit within this low-order byte. If the bit is set, it indicates the channel is in a high state. If
the bit is not set, the channel is indicated to be in a low state.

B-22

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqIOReadBit
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqIOReadBit(DaqHandleT handle, daqIODeviceType devType, daqIODevicePort devPort,
DWORD whichDevice, daqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, DWORD bitNum, PBOOL bitValue);daqIOReadBit(DaqHandleT handle, DaqIODeviceType devType, DaqIODevicePort devPort,
DWORD whichDevice, DaqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, DWORD bitNum, PBOOL bitValue);
VBdaqIOReadBit&(ByVal handle&, ByVal devType&, ByVal devPort&, ByVal whichDevice&,
ByVal whichExpPort&, ByVal bitNum&, bitValue&)daqIOReadBit(handle:DaqHandleT; devType:daqIODeviceType; dvPort:daqIODevicePort;
whichDevice:DWORD; whichExpPort:daqIOExpansionPort; bitNum:DWORD; var
bitValue:longbool)
handleHandle to the device from which to perform the IO
devType
IO Device type
devPortIO device port selection
whichDevice
IO device selection
whichExpPort
IO expansion port address
bitNum
IO port bit location to read
bitValue
IO port bit value (TRUE - high, FALSE - low)
DerrNoError
No errordaqIORead, daqIOWrite, daqIOWriteBit
DIGEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices except Personal Daq/54

daqIOReadBit allows you to read a specified bit on the selected device and port. The read operation will return the current state of theselected bit in the bitValue parameter. The selected bit (specified by the bitNum parameter) corresponds to the IO channel on the port
which is to be read. The bitValue will be TRUE indicating a high state or FALSE indicating a low state.

daqIOWriteDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqIOWrite(DaqHandleT handle, daqIODeviceType devType, daqIODevicePort devPort,
DWORD whichDevice, daqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, DWORD value);daqIOWrite(DaqHandleT handle, DaqIODeviceType devType, DaqIODevicePort devPort,
DWORD whichDevice, DaqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, DWORD value);
VBdaqIOWrite&(ByVal handle&, ByVal devType&, ByVal devPort&, ByVal whichDevice&,
ByVal whichExpPort&, ByVal value&)daqIOWrite(handle:DaqHandleT; devType:daqIODeviceType; dvPort:daqIODevicePort;
whichDevice:DWORD; whichExpPort:daqIOExpansionPort; value:DWORD);
handleHandle of the device to perform an IO write operation
devType
IO device type
devPortIO device port selection
whichDevice
IO device selection
whichExpPort
IO device expansion port address
value
Value to write
DerrNoError
No errordaqIORead, daqIOWriteBit, daqIOReadBit
DIGEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices except Personal Daq/54

daqIOWrite allows you to write to the specified port on the selected device. The write operation will write the settings indicated in thevalue parameter to the selected port. The value written will depend on the width of the selected port. Normally, for byte-wide ports, only
the low-order byte of the value parameter will be written. The IO channels for the port correspond to each bit within the value written. If thechannel is to be driven to a high state, then the corresponding bit should be set. Likewise, if the channel is to be driven to a low state, thenthe corresponding bit should not be set.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-23

daqIOWriteBit
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqIOWriteBit(DaqHandleT handle, daqIODeviceType devType, daqIODevicePort devPort,
DWORD whichDevice, daqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, DWORD bitNum, BOOL bitValue);daqIOWriteBit(DaqHandleT handle, DaqIODeviceType devType, DaqIODevicePort devPort,
DWORD whichDevice, DaqIOExpansionPort whichExpPort, DWORD bitNum, BOOL bitValue);
VBdaqIOWriteBit&(ByVal handle&, ByVal devType&, ByVal devPort&, ByVal whichDevice&,
ByVal whichExpPort&, ByVal bitNum&, ByVal bitValue&)daqIOWriteBit(handle:DaqHandleT; devType:daqIODeviceType; dvPort:daqIODevicePort;
whichDevice:DWORD; whichExpPort:daqIOExpansionPort; bitNum:DWORD;
bitValue:longbool)
handleHandle of the device to perform an IO write to
devType
IO device type
devPortIO device port selection
whichDevice
IO device selection
whichExpPort
IO device expansion port address
bitNum
Bit number to write
bitValue
Bit value to write (TRUE – high, FALSE - low)
DerrNoError
No errordaqIOWrite, daqIORead, daqIOReadBit
DIGEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices except Personal Daq/54

daqIOWriteBit allows you to write a specified bit on the selected device and port. The write operation will write the specified bit value tothe bit selected. The selected bit, specified by the bitNum parameter, corresponds to the channel on the port for the IO to be driven. The
bitValue parameter should be set to TRUE to drive the channel to a high state or FALSE indicating a low state.

daqOnline
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqOnline(DaqHandleT handle, PBOOL online);
daqOnline(DaqHandleT handle, PBOOL online);
VBdaqOnline&(ByVal handle&, online&)
daqOnline(handle: DaqHandleT; var online: longbool)
handle Handle of the device to test for online
online Boolean indicating whether the device is currently online
DerrNoError
No errordaqOpen, daqClose
None
All devices

daqOnline allows you to determine if a device is online. The device handle must be a valid device handle which has been opened using
the daqOpen function. The online parameter indicates the current online state of the device (TRUE - device online; FALSE - device notonline).

B-24

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqOpen
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References

daqOpen(LPSTR daqName);
daqOpen(LPSTR daqName);
VBdaqOpen&(ByVal daqName$)
daqOpen(devName: PChar)
daqNameString representing the name of the device to be opened
A handle to the specified device
daqClose, daqOnline
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)

Used With
Description
daqOpen allows you to open an installed Personal Daq device for operation. The daqOpen function will initiate a session for the devicename specified by the daqName parameter by opening the device, initializing it, and preparing it for further operation. The daqName
specified must reference a currently configured device. daqOpen should be performed prior to any other operation performed on thedevice. This function will return a device handle that is used by other functions to reference the device. Once the device has been opened,
the device handle should be used to perform subsequent operations on the device.
Most functions in this manual require a device handle in order to perform their operation. When the device session is complete, daqClose
may be called with the device handle to close the device session.

daqOpenList
DLL Function

daqOpenList(DaqDeviceListT * deviceList PDWORD deviceIndex, DWORD deviceCount);

C

daqOpenList(DaqDeviceListT *deviceList daqName, PDWORD deviceIndex, DWORD
deviceCount);
VBdaqOpenList&(ByVal deviceList$ deviceIndex&, ByVal deviceCount&)

Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

daqOpenList( var deviceList: DaqDeviceListT; var deviceIndex:PDWORD deviceCount:
DWORD)
DeviceList
Array of names that represents the devices to be opened
DeviceIndex

Array of indexes that represents logical device mapping for the corresponding device name

DeviceCount

Number of devices in the array to open

See Also

A handle to the specified DeviceList
daqCloseList, daqOnline, daqOpen, daqClose

Program References

MULTDEV.C

Used With
Description

PersonalDaq55/56

Returns

daqOpenList allows you to open a list of deviceCount installed Personal Daq devices. The daqOpenList function will initiate asession for the device names specified by the deviceList parameter by opening the devices, initializing them, and preparing them forfurther operation. Once initialized, all devices in the list will be referenced via the same handle, and all operations performed on that handle
will affect all devices in the list. The specified deviceList must reference currently-configured devices that are currently connected to thehost system. The deviceList parameter should consist of device names as returned by the daqGetDeviceList function.
The deviceIndex parameter will return a list of indexes representing the logical position of the corresponding named device in theopened device list. This index can then be used to program the appropriate device/channel pair in such functions as daqAdcSetScan,
daqAdcSetMux, daqAdcRd… etc.
The daqOpenList call should be performed prior to any other operation performed on the devices. This function will return a device
handle that other functions use to reference the devices. Once the device has been opened, the device handle should be used to perform
subsequent operations on the devices.
Most functions in this manual require a device handle in order to perform their operation. To close the device list when the session iscomplete, daqCloseList may be called with the returned handle.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-25

daqProcessError
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqProcessError(DaqHandleT handle, daqError errCode);
daqProcessError(DaqHandleT handle, DaqError errCode);
VBdaqProcessError&(ByVal handle&, ByVal errCode&)
daqProcessError(handle:DaqHandleT; errCode:daqError)
handleHandle to the device for which the specified error is to be processed.
errCode Specifies the device error code to process
Refer to API Error Codes on page page B-33.
daqSetDefaultErrorHandler, daqGetLastError, daqDefaultErrorHandler
None
All devices

daqProcessError allows an application to initiate an error for processing by the driver. This command can be used when it is desirable
for the application to initiate processing for a device-defined error.

daqSetDefaultErrorHandler
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqSetDefaultErrorHandler(daqErrorHandlerFPT handler);
daqSetDefaultErrorHandler(DaqErrorHandlerFPT handler);
VBdaqSetDefaultErrorHandler&(ByVal handler&)
daqSetDefaultErrorHandler(handler:daqErrorHandlerFPT)
handler
Pointer to a user-defined error handler function.
DerrNoError - No error
daqDefaultErrorHandler, daqGetLastError, daqProcessError, daqSetErrorHandler
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqSetDefaultErrorHandler allows you to set the driver to use the default error handler specified for all devices.

daqSetErrorHandler
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References

daqSetErrorHandler(DaqHandleT handle, daqErrorHandlerFPT handler);
daqSetErrorHandler(DaqHandleT handle, DaqErrorHandlerFPT handler);
VBdaqSetErrorHandler&(ByVal handle&, ByVal handler&)
daqSetErrorHandler(handle:DaqHandleT; handler:daqErrorHandlerFPT)
handleHandle to the device to which to attach the specified error handler
handler Pointer to a user defined error handler function.
DerrNoError
No errordaqSetDefaultErrorHandler, daqDefaultErrorHandler, daqGetLastError, daqProcessError
ADCEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, DIGEX1.C, INITEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB),DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)

Used With
Description
daqSetErrorHandler specifies the routine to call when an error occurs in any command. The default routine displays a message andthen terminates the program. If this is not desirable, use this command to specify your own routine to be called when errors occur. If you
want no action to occur when a command error is detected, use this command with a null (0) parameter. The default error routine isdaqDefaultHandler.

B-26

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualdaqSetOption
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqSetOption(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD chan, DWORD flags, daqOptionType optionType,FLOAT optionValue);
daqSetOption(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD chan, DWORD flags, DaqOptionType optionType,FLOAT optionValue);
VBdaqSetOption&(ByVal handle&, ByVal chan&, ByVal flags&, ByVal optionType&, ByVal
optionValue!)
daqSetOption(Handle:DaqHandleT; chan:DWORD; flags:DWORD; optionType:daqOptionType;optionValue:FLOAT)
handleThe handle to the device for which to set the optionchan
The channel number on the device for which the option is to be set
flags
Flags specifying the options to use.
optionType
Specifies the type of option.
optionValue
The value of the option to set
DerrNoError
No errordaqAdcExpSetChanOption,
PULSEEX1.C, MULTEX1.C, FREQEX1.C, DAQEX.FRM (VB), DAQEX.PAS (Delphi)
All devices

daqSetOption allows the setting of options for a device’s channel/signal path configuration.
chan specifies which channel the option applies to.
flags parameter specifies how the option is to be applied.
optionType specifies the type of option to apply to the channel.
optionValue parameter specifies the value of the option.
Note: For more information regarding optionValue and optionType refer to page B-32, Table 8.
Note: The following information does not apply to Personal Daq/54.
daqSetOption must be used to properly configure Personal Daq’s frequency input and pulse count channels. To configure frequency input
and pulse count channels, the following option types need to be specified for each frequency input/pulse count channel in the scansequence:
DcotpDaqPulses: Configures the specified channel as a pulse count channel.
DcotpDaqRising: Configures the rising flag for the pulse channel.
DcotpDaqDebounceTime: Configures the debounce time for the frequency/pulse channel.
The following options must also be specified to configure frequency input channels:
DcotpDaqMinFreq: Configures the minimum frequency range for the specified channel.
DcotpDaqMaxFreq: Configures the maximum frequency range for the specified channel.
DcotpDaqFreqRes: Configures the resolution of the specified frequency channel.
DcotpDaqOverrangeProtect: Enables the overrange protection mode.

daqSetTimeout
DLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqSetTimeout(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD mSecTimeout);
daqSetTimeout(DaqHandleT handle, DWORD mSecTimeout);
VBdaqSetTimeout&(ByVal handle&, ByVal mSecTimeout&)
daqSetTimeout(handle:DaqHandleT; mSecTimeout:DWORD)
handleHandle to the device for which the event time-out is to be set
mSecTimeout
Specifies time-out ( ms ) for events
DerrNoError
No error
daqWaitForEvent, daqWaitForEventsNone
All devices

daqSetTimeout allows you to set the time-out for waiting on a single event or multiple events. This function can be used in conjunction
with the daqWaitForEvent and daqWaitForEvents functions to specify a maximum amount of time to wait for the event(s) to besatisfied.
The mSecTimeout parameter specifies the maximum amount of time (in milliseconds) to wait for the event(s) to occur. If the event(s) do
not occur within the specified time-out, the daqWaitForEvent and/or daqWaitForEvents will return.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-27

daqWaitForEventDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters
Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqWaitForEvent(DaqHandleT handle, daqTransferEvent daqEvent);
daqWaitForEvent(DaqHandleT handle, DaqTransferEvent daqEvent);
VBdaqWaitForEvent&(ByVal handle&, ByVal daqEvent&)
daqWaitForEvent(handle:DaqHandleT; daqEvent:daqTransferEvent)handleHandle of the device for which to wait of the specified event
daqEvent
Specifies the event to wait on
DerrNoError
No error
daqWaitForEvents, daqSetTimout
None
All devices

daqWaitForEvent allows you to wait on a specific Personal Daq event to occur on the specified device. This function will not return until
the specified event has occurred or the wait has timed out— whichever comes first. The event time-out can be set with the
daqSetTimout function. See the Transfer Event Definitions table for event definitions.

daqWaitForEventsDLL Function
C
Visual BASIC
DelphiParameters

Returns
See Also
Program References
Used With
Description

daqWaitForEvents(DaqHandleT *handles, daqTransferEvent *daqEvents,
DWORD eventCount, BOOL *eventSet, daqWaitMode waitMode);
daqWaitForEvents(DaqHandleT *handles, DaqTransferEvent *daqEvents,
DWORD eventCount, BOOL *eventSet, DaqWaitMode waitMode);
VBdaqWaitForEvents&(handles&(), daqEvents&(), ByVal eventCount&, eventSet&(), ByVal
waitMode&)
daqWaitForEvents(handles:DaqHandlePT; daqEvents:daqTransferEventP;
eventCount:DWORD; eventSet:PBOOL; waitMode:daqWaitMode):*handlesPointer to an array of handles which represent the list of device on which to wait for the events*daqEvents
Pointer to an array of events which represents the list of events to wait on
eventCount
Number of defined events to wait on*eventSet
Pointer to an array of Booleans indicating if the events have been satisfied.
waitMode
Specifies the mode for the wait
DerrNoError
No error
daqWaitForEvent, daqSetTimeout
None
All devices

daqWaitForEvents allows you to wait on specific Personal Daq events to occur on the specified devices. This function will wait on thespecified events and will return based upon the criteria selected with the waitMode parameter. A time-out for all events can be specified
using the daqSetTimeout command.
Events to wait on are specified by passing an array of event definitions in the events parameter. The number of events is specified withthe eventCount parameter. See the Transfer Event Definitions table for events parameter definitions. Also see the Transfer Event Wait
Mode Definitions table for waitMode parameter definitions.

B-28

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s Manual

API Reference Tables
These tables provide information for programming with the Personal Daq Application Programming
Interface. Information includes channel identification and error codes, as well as valid parameter values
and descriptions. The tables are organized as follows:

API Parameter Reference Tables
Table

Sub-Title/Parameter/Description

1. daq Device Property Definitions daqGetDeviceProperties

Identifies the format (DWORD, STRING, or FLOAT) for property parameters

B-30

2. General I/O Definintions

Digital I/O Port Connection: devPort – daqIODevicePort
I/O Port Type: devType – daqIODeviceType
I/O Operation Code: whichExpPort –daqIOExpansionPort
I/O Operation Code: daqIOOperationCode

B-30

3. Event-Handling Definitions

Transfer Event Definitions - daqTransferEvent
Transfer Event Wait Mode Definitions - daqWaitMode

B-31

4. Hardware Version Definitions

daqHardwareVersion

B-31

5. Analog Gain Definitions

Identifies gain codes for Personal Daq base unit

B-31

6. Trigger Source Definitions

daqAdcTriggerSource
daqEnhTrigSensT

B-31

7. Miscellaneous Definitions

Scan Flag Definitions - daqAdcFlag
Frequency vs Period - daqAdcRateMode
Acquisition Mode Definitions - daqAdcAcqMode
Transfer Mask Definitions - daqAdcTransferMask
File Open Mode Definitions - daqAdcOpenMode
Acquisition/Transfer Active Flag Definitions - daqAdcActiveFlag
Acquisition State - daqAdcAcqState
BufferTransfer Mask- daqAdcBufferXferMask

B-32

8. Setting Options

optionType
optionValue

B-32

9. API Error Codes

Identifies API errors by number and description

B-33(Does not apply to
Personal Daq/54)

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

Page

API Commands

B-29

Table 1.

daq Device Property Definitions

Property
deviceType
basePortAddress
dmaChannel
protocolalias
maxAdChannels
maxDaChannels
maxDigInputBits
maxDigOutputBits
maxCtrChannels
mainUnitAdChannels
mainUnitDaChannels
mainUnitDigInputBits
mainUnitDigOutputBits
mainUnitCtrChannels
adFifoSize
daFifoSize
adResolution
daResolution
adMinFreq
adMaxFreq
daMinFreq
daMaxFreq
MainUnitCjcChannels
TotalCjcChannels
SerialNumber
ExpansionUnits
SubDeviceType
Table 2.

daqGetDeviceProperties

Description
Main Chassis Device Type Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Host computer Interface used
Device Alias Name
Maximum A/D channels (with full expansion)
Not Used
Maximum Dig. Inputs (with full expansion)
Maximum Dig. Outputs (with full expansion)
Maximum Counter/Timers (with full expansion)
Maximum Main Unit A/D channels (no expansion)
Not Used
Maximum Main Unit Digital Inputs (no expansion)
Maximum Main Unit Digital Outputs (no expansion)
Maximum Main Unit Counter/Timer channels (no exp.)
Not Used
Not Used
Maximum A/D Converter Resolution
Not Used
Minimum Scan Frequency (Hz)Maximum Scan Frequency (Hz)Not Used
Not Used
Number of CJC channels on the main unit
Number of CJC channels in the system
Serial Number for the device
Number of expansion units
Type of expansion unit

Format
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
STRING
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
FLOAT
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD

General I/O Definitions

Digital I/O Port Connections

devPort - daqIODevicePort

Personal Daq Port

Value
00h
01h
02h
03h
10h
11h
12h
13h

DiodpPdaqPort1
DiodpPdaqPort2
DiodpPdaqExpPort1
DiodpPdaqExpPort2
DiodpPdaqPowerUpPort1
DiodpPdaqPowerUpPort2
DiodpPdaqPowerUpExpPort1
DiodpPdaqPowerUpExpPort2

I/O Port Type

Description
Local Port 1
Local Port 2
Expansion Port 1 (PDQ Option)
Expansion Port 2 (PDQ Option)
Power-up Setting for Local Port 1
Power-up Setting for Local Port 2Power-up Setting for Exp Port 1
Power-up Setting for Exp Port 2

devType - daqIODeviceType

Personal Daq Type
DiodtPdaqDigIO

Value
0ch

I/O Operation Code Definitions
Personal Daq Device
Device Index

Description
For all units except Personal Daq/54

whichDevice
Value
VariesDescription
See daqOpenList function

whichExpPort - daqIOExpansionPort
Device Expansion Port0

Field ignored for Personal Daq

daqIOOperationCode
DioocReadByte
DioocWriteByte
DioocReadWord
DioocWriteWord
DioocReadDWord
DioocWriteDWord

B-30

API Commands

0
1
2
3
4
5

Note: daqIOOperationCode does not
apply to Personal Daq/54.

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualTable 3.

Event-Handling Definitions

Transfer Event Definitions daqTransferEvent

Transfer Event Wait Mode Definitions daqWaitMode

DteAdcData
DteAdcDone
DteDacData
DteDacDone
DteIOData
DteIODone

DwmNoWait
DwmWaitForAny
DwmWaitForAll

Table 4.

0
1
2
3
4
5

0
1
2

Hardware Version Definitions
daqHardwareVersion

Definition

Value

PersonalDaq56

100H

PersonalDaq55(Note)

101H

Note: Includes “NE” version.

Table 5.

ADC Gain Definitions

Base Unit Combination
PgainX1
PgainX2
PgainX4
PgainX8
PgainX16
PgainX32
PgainX64
PgainX128
PgainX1 + PgainDiv5
PgainX2 + PgainDiv5
PgainX4 + PgainDiv5
PgainX8 + PgainDiv5
PgainX16 + PgainDiv5
PgainX32 + PgainDiv5
PgainX64 + PgainDiv5
PgainX128 + PgainDiv5
PgainDiv5

Parameters
0
1
16
17
18
19
20
21
0
+
8
1
+
8
16
+
8
17
+
8
18
+
8
19
+
8
20
+
8
21
+
8
8

Voltage Range- 4 to + 4 V- 2 to + 2 V- 1 to + 1 V- 500 to + 500 mV- 250 to + 250 mV- 125 to + 125 mV- 62.5 to + 62.5 mV- 31 to + 31 mV- 20 to + 20 V
- 10 to + 10 V
- 5 to + 5 V- 2.5 to + 2.5 V- 1.25 to + 1.25 V- 312 to + 312 mV- 156 to + 156 mV- 62 to + 62 mV

Trigger Source Definitions
daqAdcTriggerSource
daqEnhTrigSensT
Table 6.

DatsImmediate
DatsSoftware
DatsSoftwareAnalog
DatsDigitalChannel
DatsFrequency
DatsPulseCount
DatsPulseTotalize
DatsAnalogSELow
DatsAnalogSEHigh

0
1
6
8
9
10
11
12
13

DetsRisingEdge
DetsFallingEdge

0
1

*
*
*
*

* DatsDigitalChannel, DatsFrequency, DatsPulseCount, and DatsPulseTotalize
do not apply to Personal Daq/54.

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-31

Table 7.

ADC Miscellaneous Definitions

ADC Flag Definitions - daqAdcFlag
Analog/High Speed Digital Flag
DafAnalog
00h
DafScanDigital*
01h
Measurement Durations
DafMeasDuration610
000000h
DafMeasDuration370
100000h
DafMeasDuration310
200000h
DafMeasDuration130
300000h
DafMeasDuration110
400000h
DafMeasDuration40
500000h
DafMeasDuration20
600000h
DafMeasDuration12_5
700000hFrequency vs Period –daqAdcRateMode
DarmPeriod
DarmFrequency

01Single-Ended Channel Flag
DafSingleEndedLow
DafSingleEndedHigh
Thermocouple Types
DafTcTypeJ
DafTcTypeK
DafTcTypeT
DafTcTypeE
DafTcTypeN
DafTcTypeS
DafTcTypeR
DafTcTypeB

0000h
1000h
080h
100h
180h
200h
280h
380h
400h
480h

ADC Acquisition Mode Definitions daqAdcAcqModeADC Transfer Mask Definitions daqAdcTransferMask

DaamNShot
DaamNShotRearm
DaamInfinitePost
DaamPrePost

DatmCycleOff
DatmCycleOn
DatmUpdateBlock
DatmUpdateSingle
DatmUserBuf
DatmSavePreTrig
DatmIgnoreOverruns
DatmDriverBuf

ADC Clock Source Definitions
daqAdcClockSource

ADC Acquisition State daqAdcAcqState
DaasPreTrig
DaasPostTrig

Single Ended/Differential Flag
DafSingleEnded
00h
DafDifferential
08h
Digital/Frequency Channel Types
DafDioDirect*
00000hDafCtrPulse*
20000hDafCtrTotalize*
40000hDafCtrFreq*
80000hDafCtrDutyLo*
100000h
DafCtrDutyHi*
200000h

0
1

0
1
2
3

00h
01h
00h
02h
00h
20h
10h
08h

ADC File Open Mode Definitions
daqAdcOpenModeADC Acquisition/Transfer Active Flag Definitions
daqAdcActiveFlag

DaomAppendFile
DaomWriteFile
DaomCreateFile

0
1
2

DaafAcqActive
DaafAcqTriggered
DaafTransferActive

ADC Buffer Transfer Mask daqAdcBufferXferMask

ADC Filter Type daqAdcSetFilter

DabtmWait
DabtmRetAvail
DabtmNoWait
DabtmRetNotDone
DabtmPreTrigBlockdaftSWAvg

00h
02h
04h
08h
10h

01h
02h
04h

1

Setting Options
optionType
Table 8.

DcotpdaqRising
DcotpdaqDebounceTime
DcotpdaqMinFreq
DcotpdaqMaxFreq
DcotpdaqPulses
DcotpdaqFreqRes
DcotpdaqRunningCal
DcotpDaqOverrangeProtect

0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8

Sets the rising flag for the Pulse Channel
Sets the debounce time for the Freq/Pulse Channel
Sets the min freq range for the Freq Channel
Sets the max freq range for the Freq Channel
Sets the specified Freq/Pulse channel as Pulse Count
Sets the resolution of the Freq Channel
Sets the running calibration flag for the system
Enables the over range protection mode

optionValue
DcovEdgeRising
DcovDutyHigh
DcovEdgeFalling
DcovDutyLow
DcovPulseTotalize
DcovPulseCount
Debounce Settings
DcovDebounce0
DcovDebounce600
DcovDebounce2500
DcovDebounce10000

*
*
*
*
*
*

00h
02h
08h
0Ah
10h
00h

Sets the edge sensing to rising for the Pulse/Freq Channel
Sets the Pulse Channel to Duty Cycle High
Sets the edge sensing to falling for the Pulse/Freq Channel
Sets the Pulse Channel to Duty Cycle Low
Sets the Pulse Channel to Totalize
Sets the Channel as Pulse Count (Default)

*
*
*
*

00h
01h
02h
03h

Set Debounce to 0 us for the Pulse/Freq channel
Set Debounce to 600 us for the Pulse/Freq channel
Set Debounce to 2500 us for the Pulse/Freq channel
Set Debounce to 10000 us for the Pulse/Freq channel* Note: The Asterisks in the preceding tables indicate that the definitions do not apply to Personal Daq/54.
B-32

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualTable 9.

API Error Codes

Error Name
DerrNoError
DerrBadChannel
DerrNotOnLine
DerrNodaqbook
DerrBadAddress
DerrFIFOFull
DerrBadDma
DerrBadInterrupt
DerrDmaBusy
DerrInvChan
DerrInvCount
DerrInvTrigSource
DerrInvLevel
DerrInvGain
DerrInvDacVal
DerrInvExpCard
DerrInvPort
DerrInvChip
DerrInvDigVal
DerrInvBitNum
DerrInvClock
DerrInvTod
DerrInvCtrNum
DerrInvCntSource
DerrInvCtrCmd
DerrInvGateCtrl
DerrInvOutputCtrl
DerrInvInterval
DerrTypeConflict
DerrMultBackXfer
DerrInvDiv

Code #
hex - dec
00h - 001h - 102h - 203h - 304h - 405h - 506h - 607h - 708h - 810h - 1611h - 1712h - 1813h - 1914h - 2015h - 2116h - 2217h - 2318h - 2419h - 25
1Ah - 26
1Bh - 27
1Ch - 28
1Dh - 29
1Eh - 30
1Fh - 3120h - 3221h - 33
22h - 34
23h - 3524h - 3625h - 37

Description
No error
Specified LPT channel was out-of-range
Requested device is not online
daqBook is not on the requested channel
Bad function address
FIFO Full detected, possible data corruption
Bad or illegal DMA channel or mode specified for device
Bad or illegal INTERRUPT level specified for device
DMA is currently being used
Invalid analog input channel
Invalid count parameter
Invalid trigger source parameter
Invalid trigger level parameter
Invalid channel gain parameter
Invalid DAC output parameter
Invalid expansion card parameter
Invalid port parameter
Invalid chip parameter
Invalid digital output parameter
Invalid bit number parameter
Invalid clock parameter
Invalid time-of-day parameter
Invalid counter number
Invalid counter source parameter
Invalid counter command parameter
Invalid gate control parameter
Invalid output control parameter
Invalid interval parameter
An integer was passed to a function requiring a characterA second background transfer was requested
Invalid Fout divisor

Temperature Conversion Errors
DerrTCE_TYPE
DerrTCE_TRANGE
DerrTCE_VRANGE
DerrTCE_PARAM
DerrTCE_NOSETUP

26h - 38
27h - 3928h - 4029h - 41
2Ah - 42

TC type out-of-range
Temperature out-of-CJC-range
Voltage out-of-TC-range
Unspecified parameter value error
dacTCConvert called before dacTCSetup

daqBook
DerrNotCapable

2Bh - 43

Device is incapable of function

Background
DerrOverrun

2Ch - 44

A buffer overrun occurred

Zero and Cal Conversion Errors
DerrZCInvParam
DerrZCNoSetup
DerrInvCalFile

2Dh - 45
2Eh - 46
2Fh - 47

Unspecified parameter value error
dac…Convert called before dac…Setup
Cannot open the specified cal file

Environmental Errors
DerrMemLock
DerrMemHandle

30h - 48
31h - 49

Cannot lock allocated memory from operating system
Cannot get a memory handle from operating system

Pre-trigger acquisition Errors
DerrNoPreTActive

32h - 50

No pre-trigger configured

Personal Daq User’s Manual

Appendix B, 887095

API Commands

B-33

API Error Codes
DerrTooManyHandles

60h - 96

No more handles available to open

DerrInvLockMask

61h - 97

Only a part of the resource is already locked, must be all or none

DerrAlreadyLocked

62h - 98

All or part of the resource was locked by another application

DerrAcqArmed63h - 99

Operation not available while an acquisition is armed

DerrParamConflict

64h - 100

Each parameter is valid, but the combination is invalid

DerrInvMode

65h - 101

Invalid acquisition/wait/dac mode

DerrInvOpenMode66h - 102

Invalid file-open mode

DerrFileOpenError

67h - 103

Unable to open file

DerrFileWriteError

68h - 104

Unable to write file

DerrFileReadError

69h - 105

Unable to read file

DerrInvClockSource

6Ah - 106

Invalid acquisition mode

DerrInvEvent

6Bh - 107

Invalid transfer event

DerrTimeout

6Ch - 108

Time-out on wait

DerrInitFailure

6Dh - 109

Unexpected result occurred while initializing the hardware

DerrBufTooSmall

6Eh - 110

Unexpected result occurred while initializing the hardware

DerrInvType

6Fh - 111

Invalid acquisition/wait/dac mode

DerrArraySize

70h - 112

Used as a catch all for arrays not large enough

DerrBadAlias

71h - 113

Invalid alias names for Vxd lookup

DerrInvCommand

72h - 114

Invalid command

DerrInvHandle

73h - 115

Invalid handle

DerrNoTransferActive

74h - 116

Transfer not active

DerrNoAcqActive

75h - 117

Acquisition not active

DerrInvOpstr

76h - 118

Invalid operation string used for triggering

DerrDspCommFailure

77h - 119

Device with DSP failed communication

DerrEepromCommFailure

78h - 120

Device with EEPROM failed communication

DerrInvEnhTrig

79h - 121

Device using enhanced trigger detected invalid trigger type

DerrInvCalConstant

7Ah - 122

User calibration constant out of range

DerrInvErrorCode7Bh - 123

Invalid error code

DerrInvAdcRange

7Ch - 124

Invalid analog input voltage range parameter

DerrInvCalTableType

7Dh - 125

Invalid calibration table type

DerrInvCalInput

7Eh - 126

Invalid calibration input signal selection

DerrInvRawDataFormat

7Fh - 127

Invalid raw-data format selection

DerrNotImplemented

80h - 128

Feature/function not implemented yet

DerrInvDioDeviceType81h - 129

Invalid digital I/O device type

DerrInvPostDataFormat

82h - 130

Invalid post-processing data format selection

DerrdaqStalled

83h - 131

Personal Daq low level driver stalled

DerrdaqLostPower84h – 132

Personal Daq device has lost power

DerrdaqMissing

85h – 133

Personal Daq device is not detected

DerrdaqScanConfig

86h – 134

Scan Configuration is invalid

B-34

API Commands

Appendix B, 887095

Personal Daq User’s ManualCustom Labels

D

This appendix consists of blank user labels and a Personal Daq channel layout reference (page D-3). If you have access to
Microsoft WordTM you can create custom labels in your PC since the labels exist in a file (pDaq_CustomLabels.doc) on yourinstallation CD. During the installation process the file is automatically copied to the target directory for pDaqView. You canchange the directory, if desired.
Note:

You can use a shortcut entitled Custom Labels Template to access pDaq_CustomLabels.doc. The shortcut will belocated in the Personal DaqView program group.

The labels in the file consist of tables with each cell set to scale. The default font is Arial, 6pt. centered. This can bechanged, based on your specific labeling preferences.
You can orient your label entrees horizontally, vertically, or upside down, as appropriate to your application. The importantfactor is that your labels correspond to the actual channel designations. These designations are clearly visible on the
Personal Daq products, and are also illustrated on page D-3 for easy reference.
The labels are twice as wide as, and slightly longer than, the label slots on the Personal Daq device. The double-widthallows you to fold the labels for extra rigidity. The extra length and rigidity make the insertion and removal of the labels
easier. Note that when properly positioned, the shaded areas of a label will extend beyond the edge of the label slots.

Personal Daq User’s Manual, 878695

Appendix D

Custom Labels

D-1

This side of the label page is intentionally blank.

D-2

Custom Labels

Appendix D

Personal Daq User’s ManualChannel Connection Layouts, Page 1 of 2

Personal Daq User’s Manual, 878695

Appendix D

Custom Labels

D-3

Channel Connection Layouts, Page 2 of 2

D-4

Custom Labels

Appendix D

Personal Daq User’s Manual